JP2020130893A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine may execute a first display performance as one performance out of a plurality of display performances, and may execute a second display performance as one performance out of the plurality of display performances. The first display performance executes a first zone performance, and the second display performance executes a second zone performance different from the first zone performance. A combination performance including the first display performance and the second display performance may be executed. In the combination performance, the second display performance is executed while the first display performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 93

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. In addition, the reference reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs the first zone effect.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and the first zone effect and the second zone effect end at the same timing.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the state which the 1st movable accessory 14 moves. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st display effect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd display effect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of a light guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 3rd movable accessory 18. It is a figure for demonstrating the next timer value display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the next timer value display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the next timer value display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the next timer value display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display number suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display number suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display number suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display number suggestion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the image transparent display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the image transparent display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the image transparent display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the image transparent display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating image combination effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the image combination effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the image combination effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the image combination effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the interlocking effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon image matching effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon image matching effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon image matching effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon image matching effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory impact effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory impact effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory impact effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory impact effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the zone effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the zone effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the zone effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the zone effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the cut-in effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the cut-in effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the cut-in effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the cut-in effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating game state suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating game state suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating game state suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state suggestion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the related image display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the related image display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the related image display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the related image display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production D. It is a figure for demonstrating the cracking effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the cracking effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the cracking effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the cracking effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter button effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter button effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter button effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter button effect D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction as seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and a light guide plate 17 is arranged in the opening. The light guide plate 17 is a transparent flat plate member, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 is configured to be able to display an image on the main surface by irradiating light from the end surface of the light guide plate 17. The image displayed by the light guide plate 17 will be described later.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during an effect performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding upward from the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), general winning It is provided with a mouth 29 (ordinary winning mouth 29), an out mouth 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3, and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L. A second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a hold image display area in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digest image display in which the hold digest image 9C is displayed. It has an area and. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C. The hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variable display mode of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) (not shown) is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) (not shown) is displayed in the symbol display area inside. In the symbol display area on the right, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) (not shown) is displayed. The effect symbols displayed in the second effect symbol display area are the same as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect symbol display area, and are smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is displayed.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like. .. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first special symbol is reserved. 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

In front of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that four plate-shaped members (movable light guide plates) can be moved in an oblique direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) at the four corners of the display device 7, and moves (advances) diagonally from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to advance. It can stand still at the position (FIG. 47). The first movable accessory 14 covers almost the entire image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. Further, on the back surface of the center decorative body 10, a third board movable body 18 (third movable accessory 18) (not shown) is arranged. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 should be in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probabilistic operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right hit". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize at the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first major winning opening 30 and second major winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning are calculated. , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , Is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of game states, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as (including) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. To do. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The frame lamp 66 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the light guide plate 17 with light, and by causing the LED to emit light, an image is displayed on the main surface (image display area) of the light guide plate 17. Further, the panel lamp 5 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the movable light guide plate of the first movable accessory 14 with light, and by causing the LED to emit light, the main surface (image display area) of the movable light guide plate is formed. Display the image. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18, and the operation pattern data. The movement of these movable accessories is controlled according to the above. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14, 15, and 18. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when the human body comes into contact with the relay board 108. It may be connected.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. Drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be judged as "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach the time of loss than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passing jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", it is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 will be open even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are such that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It has become. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. In addition, after the time-saving game is completed, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the game state in the "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot". However, apparently, it becomes a high accuracy and low base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is changed. It is a latent state (latent probability change state) that the probability is high even though it is a high probability low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent probability change state. That is, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" big hit Low probability after the game (low accuracy) High base state) and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" jackpot After the game, high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state), and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" time saving end The later low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the time reduction of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" are performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the lottery rate for the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning a prize in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy high-base state are "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", and " 16R (actually 13R) V will pass the jackpot. " For "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot", in the high accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. Ends with. In the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", in the high-accuracy high-base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and the high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability change). It ends when it becomes a state) or when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed.
In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a low-accuracy high-base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In this jackpot, in the low accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. It ends when the game is executed.
When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss predetermination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 holding balls described later, and the first special drawing is based on the number of special figure 1 holding balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If no game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reserved storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach presence / absence pre-judgment result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is judged as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is judged as "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if there is a "loss" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to (the part of" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion (“P4” to “P6”) corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” to The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). ”To“ P46 ”)). From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state (actually, the high probability state continues until the next big hit). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time saving counter in the low accuracy high base state, and "100" or "10000" is set in the time saving counter in the high accuracy high base state. ("100" is set for "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" (latent probability variation jackpot), and "10000" is set for "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (real 15R) V passing jackpot". Will be). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that was temporarily closed after opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the grand prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" for the player, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to finish this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first large winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process ends as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "10000". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" or "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). More specifically, "100" for "16R (real 13R) V planned jackpot" (latent probability variation jackpot), "10000" for "16RV scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot". "Is set. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or 10000 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the gaming state after that becomes the high-accuracy low-base state, and the high-accuracy state is hidden.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost a jackpot before the 10,000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 21H) is during the jackpot game. If V is passed, it is almost guaranteed that the game state after the big hit will be a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variable effect in-process is a process for setting a command before the end of the variation at a specific timing during the variable effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the pre-reading effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the change effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variation effect start process” is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during a special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The preliminary determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 has a "big hit" as the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined by, for example, a fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is performed are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random number value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. Multiple types of core production patterns are set to produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance up random number, and determines the chance up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the effect pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the advance notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the command before the end of fluctuation does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image specified in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation / display effect of the board movable body and display effect of the light guide plate 17 Using FIGS. 46 to 52, the board movable body (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, and third movable accessory) The operation of 18), the display effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the display effect of the light guide plate 17 will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 18 to operate during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. Take control. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 irradiates the end faces of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 with light during a game effect (display effect) or in an initial operation when the power is turned on to obtain a specific image. Perform a display effect to display.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable accessory 14 moves.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14.
The first movable accessory 14 includes four transparent members (movable light guide plates), each of which is movable. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plate) have a substantially rectangular shape. The first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable accessory 14 can move from the state of FIG. 1 to the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 47 by moving (advancing) upward. It can be stationary (second aspect). In this second aspect, the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) cover almost the entire display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7. Further, the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) four transparent members (movable light guide plates) from the state of FIG. 47. , You can stand still there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first display effect of the first movable accessory 14. The main surface of the four transmissive members (movable light guide plate) is an image display area, and a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is displayed there. be able to. When the first board movable body 14 is in the second aspect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second display effect of the first movable accessory 14. In the image display area of the four transparent members (movable light guide plate), the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be displayed. The first movable accessory 14 can independently switch the four character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" into a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of the light guide plate. The light guide plate 17 can display a plurality of (here, seven) smile image SLs at different positions on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 can independently switch the seven smile image SLs into a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15.
The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) in which the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first aspect). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. In the second movable accessory 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and the rotation effect can be performed in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 18.
The third movable accessory 18 is configured such that a frame-shaped member can move up and down, and can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) (first aspect). When the third movable accessory 18 is located at the home position, it is not visible to the player. By moving (advancing) downward from the home position, the third movable accessory 18 can move to the advanced position (deployed position, expanded position) shown in FIG. 52 and can be stationary there (second aspect). ). In this second aspect, the third movable accessory 18 covers a part of the image display device 7 as seen from the player. Further, the third movable accessory 18 can be moved to the home position by moving (evacuating) upward from the state shown in FIG. 52, and can be stationary there.

The third movable accessory 18 has a frame shape and is formed in a rhombus shape. When the third movable accessory 18 is in the deployed position (in the case of the second aspect), the display of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 can be visually recognized from the hollow portion surrounded by the frame-shaped portion.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The next timer value display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. This next timer value display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the next timer value display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Next timer value display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the next timer value display effect A. In the next timer value display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this state, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (B). The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the timer image TM1 is started immediately after it is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 53 (D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 5 seconds), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is enlarged and becomes the current timer value. It is also displayed. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 53 (D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” which overlaps with the current timer value “5” and has transparency is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 can be visually recognized via the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1 and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" are images that protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT is reduced in a state of overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and the display position of the timer image TM1 approach the portion (image area) where the counter value is represented. In other words, the next timer value image NT is reduced so as to fit in the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and display position of the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the timer image TM1 is displayed. The image is complete. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position match the "5" part of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT "4" and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of the TM1 “5” match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with the “4”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the second next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Similar to FIG. 53 (D), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. Here, the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "4", and the value "3" to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value "4". The next timer value image NT representing "3" is enlarged and displayed with transparency and overlaps with the current timer value "4", and the upper and lower ends of the number "3" protrude from the display screen 7a. It is in a state. After that, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT approaches the numerical portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1 while being reduced while overlapping with the timer image TM1. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. 53 (H). Here, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and display position match the "4" part of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT and "3" and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of "4" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes "3". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. 53 (I). The timer zero display effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. After that, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the next timer value display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the timer image TM1 is started immediately after it is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54C, the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "30", the value "29" to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value "30". In FIG. 54C, the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed in a slanted state at a position that does not overlap with the current timer value “30”. Since the next timer value image NT representing "29" is enlarged and displayed, a part of the next timer value image NT sometimes protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the reduction rotation effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT moves toward the timer image TM1 while rotating and reducing, and overlaps with the timer image TM1. After that, the reduction is continued while overlapping with the timer image TM1, the size and orientation are close to the numerical portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1, and the display position approaches. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. 54 (E). Here, the next timer value image NT representing “29” is reduced so that the size and display position match the “30” portion of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT “29” and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of "30" of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes "29". The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or immediately after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

In the next timer value display effect B, the content of the next timer value display effect changes randomly. As an example, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), when the timer value is predetermined (here, when it is "5"), the timer image TM1 is decremented as it is without displaying the next timer value. To. Further, as another example, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the same effect as the next timer value display effect A is performed. That is, the next timer value image NT representing the transparent “3” that overlaps the current timer value “4” is enlarged and displayed, and the upper and lower ends of the number “4” protrude from the display screen 7a. Then, the next timer value image NT representing "3" is reduced so that the size and display position match the "4" portion of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT "3" and the timer image TM1 Immediately after the size and position of "4" match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with "4" as shown in FIG. 54 (H). This completes the decrementation of the timer image TM1.

As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value display effect with random contents, the timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed as shown in FIG. 54 (I). After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. After that, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the next timer value display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is started immediately after being displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being executed, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (C). The second timer image TM2 has the same configuration as the first timer image TM1. The second timer image TM2 may have a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. The countdown of the second timer image TM2 is started immediately after being displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after being displayed. Here, after "09" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "09" means 9 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 55 (D) to 55 (G), in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, the next timer value enlarged display effect is exhibited in the same manner as the next timer value display effect A. , The next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect are repeated in order, and the countdown is executed. In the next timer value enlarged display effect, specifically, when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (first value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the first timer image TM1. Is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. When the timer value of the second timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value (second value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the second timer image TM2 is enlarged and becomes the current timer value. It is also displayed. The first value and the second value that trigger the start of the next timer value enlarged display effect may be the same value or different values. Further, the next timer value enlarged display effect may be started at the same timing as the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, or may be started at different timings. If the timings are different, the first timer image TM1 may be started first, or the second timer image TM2 may be started first.

In FIG. 55 (D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is executed in both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2. The first timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "05", and the next timer value image NT1 representing the value "4" to be displayed next is enlarged, and the current timer value is "05". It is also displayed. The next timer value image NT1 has transparency, and the first timer image TM1 can be visually recognized via the next timer image NT1. Since the next timer value image NT1 is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the first timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" are images that protrude from the display screen 7a. The second timer image TM2 (current timer value) is "09", and the next timer value image NT2 representing the value "8" to be displayed next is enlarged, and the current timer value is "09". It is also displayed.

In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (E), the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1 is executed. Specifically, the size and display position of the next timer value image NT1 approaches the numerical portion (counter value portion) of the first timer image TM1 while being reduced while overlapping with the first timer image TM1. Then, when the size and display position of the next timer value image NT1 substantially match the counter value portion of the first timer image TM1, the decrementation of the first timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. 55 (F). ..

The second timer image TM2 in FIG. 55 (E) shows a state in which the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT2 is completed and the decrement is completed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (F), the next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (G), the next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (G), the decrement is completed after the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1. The timing of the decrements of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, when the countdown is executed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 while repeating the next timer value enlargement display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, FIG. 55 ( As shown in H), in the first timer image TM1, a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (I), a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero), and in FIG. 55 (J), the position where the second timer image TM2 is displayed is displayed. , The second expectation suggestion image EI2 suggesting the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EI2 is an image suggesting that the expectation is higher than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Next timer value display effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the next timer value display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, the first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. The variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is started immediately after being displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being executed, the second timer image TM2 is newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (C). The second timer image TM2 has a configuration different from that of the first timer image TM1. Each configuration will be described later. The countdown of the second timer image TM2 is started immediately after being displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after being displayed. Here, after "08" is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "08" means 8 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 55 (G), the first timer image TM1 is counted down while repeating the next timer value movement display effect and the decrement completion effect in this order. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56C, in the next timer value movement display effect, the next timer value image NT1 "04" is displayed above the first timer image TM1 "05". Will be done. The next timer value image NT1 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56 (D), "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves downward, and a part of it is covered with "05" of the first timer image TM1 and becomes invisible. As shown in FIG. 56 (E), when the "04" of the next timer value image NT1 moves to the position of "05" of the first timer image TM1 and is covered by the first timer image TM1 and completely invisible. The value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by one. As shown in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (G), this procedure is repeated to count down the first timer image TM1.

As shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 55 (G), the second timer image TM2 is counted down while repeating the timer value movement effect and the decrement completion effect in this order. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the next timer value image NT2 "07" is displayed above the second timer image TM2 "08", and the second timer image TM2 is displayed. "09", which is the previous timer value image PT2, is displayed below. The next timer value image NT2 is an image representing the value to be displayed next by the second timer image TM2. The front timer value image PT2 is an image representing the value displayed immediately before by the second timer image TM2. A triangular arrow image YG is displayed on the left side of the second timer image TM2. As shown in FIG. 56 (D), the next timer value image NT2 "07", the second timer image TM2 "08", and the previous timer value image PT2 "09" are drawn downward while drawing an arc. Moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the position where the second timer image TM2 is displayed, that is, the position “07” of the next timer value image NT2 on the right side of the arrow image YG, causes the second timer Image TM2 decrement is complete. As shown in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (G), this procedure is repeated to count down the second timer image TM2. The timing of the decrements of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

As described above, when the countdown is executed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, the timer value is 0 (zero) in the first timer image TM1 as shown in FIG. 56 (H). ), The timer zero display effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56 (I), a timer zero display effect is performed in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero), and in FIG. 56 (J), the position where the second timer image TM2 is displayed is displayed. , The second expectation suggestion image EI2 suggesting the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EI2 is an image suggesting that the expectation is higher than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the next timer value display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the timer image TM is displayed on the display screen 7a after the first timer value represented by the timer image TM1. The next timer value display effect in which the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed so as to overlap at least one minute of the timer image TM1. Will be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has transparency, and the timer image TM1 Becomes visible via the next timer image NT. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is from the timer image TM1 representing the first timer value. After being displayed as a large image, the first timer value is reduced so as to fit in the displayed image area, and the second timer value becomes the timer image TM1 by replacing the first timer value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, in the next timer image NT representing the second timer value, a part of the second timer value is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a protruding image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the next timer value display effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the next timer value display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the next timer value display effect of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TM has been described as counting down. However, the timer image TM may be counted up. Further, the count value is not limited to numbers, but may be specific characters, figures, symbols, or the like. For example, the countdown may be such that images such as a rabbit, a turtle, and a bear are displayed in order. It may also be a Roman numeral.

[Modification 2]
The next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56 may be appropriately combined. For example, the timer image TM of FIG. 53 may have the same mode as that of the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56. Further, each of the next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56 may not include a part of the effects. For example, in FIG. 53, the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the next timer value display effect of FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer value of the timer image TM is assumed to be finally zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM may end at a non-zero value. For example, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image representing a timer value.
With the timer image displayed on the display means, an image representing a second timer value displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image is displayed on the display means. A game machine characterized by being able to execute.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
In the effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the image representing the second timer value is displayed so as to overlap at least one minute of the timer image.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as a transparent image, and the timer image becomes visible through the image representing the second timer value. Machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-3.
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image larger than the image representing the first timer value, and then fits in the image area where the first timer value is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the second timer value becomes the timer image by reducing the size to the above and replacing the first timer value.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-4.
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image in which a part of the second timer value protrudes from the display means.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-5.
The effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer display number suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. This timer display number suggestion effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer display number suggestion effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This timer display number suggestion effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). The timer display number suggestion effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations (plural variation effects) of the special symbol.

[Timer display count suggestion effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggestion effect A.
In the timer display number suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57B, the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
The timer count suggestion display XA2 has a function of suggesting the number of timer displays that may appear in the future and also suggesting that the timer display itself is performed.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57C, the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 57C, it is shown that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANGE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57 (E), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", suggesting that the timer display appears once after the second timer count suggestion display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 57 (F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (G), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed as "super hot" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggestion effect B.
In the timer display number suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58B, the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58C, the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer count suggestion is indicated as compared with the time of the first timer count suggestion display effect. It is reduced by 1 and suggests that the timer display appears once more. FIG. 58 (C) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANGE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 58 (E), the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates "one more timer". It is suggested that the timer display appears once after the second timer number suggestion display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 58 (F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed as "super hot" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggestion effect C.
In the timer display number suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59B, the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "two more timers", suggesting that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59C, the timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer display suggestion display XA5 is indicated as "waiting for XX seconds", suggesting that the timer display is waiting and will start from now on. In this case, the number of "X" s in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 is one, and "waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X" in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 may be three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. Further, the character is not limited to "X" and may be another alphabet, or may be a symbol such as "○", "□", "△", "?", "!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer count suggestion is indicated as compared with the time of the first timer count suggestion display effect. It is reduced by 1 and suggests that the timer display appears once more. In FIG. 59 (D), it is shown that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANGE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 59 (F), the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates "one more timer". It is suggested that the timer display appears once more after the second timer number suggestion display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 59 (F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed as "super hot" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggestion effect D.
In the timer display number suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60B, the first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the upper area. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60B, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "timer 2 more times", suggesting that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, the timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, the timer standby suggestion display XA5 is displayed in the area below the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer display suggestion display XA5 is indicated as "waiting for XX seconds", suggesting that the timer display is waiting and will start from now on. In this case, the number of "X" s in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of "X" in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 is one, and "waiting for X seconds" is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of "X" in the timer wait suggestion display XA5 may be three, and "waiting for XXX seconds" may be displayed. Further, the character is not limited to "X" and may be another alphabet, or may be a symbol such as "○", "□", "△", "?", "!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the upper area of the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the lower area of the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer count suggestion is indicated as compared with the time of the first timer count suggestion display effect. It is reduced by 1 and suggests that the timer display appears once more. In FIG. 60 (D), it is shown that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Further, during the first timer display effect, the accessory effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 to the deployed position is performed. In this accessory effect, the second movable accessory 15 displays at least a part of the timer display area XA1 (timer number suggestion display XA2 and timer display XA3) and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when viewed from the player. cover.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANGE" indicating that the jackpot expectation is medium. There is. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 60 (F), the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates "one more timer". It is suggested that the timer display appears once after the second timer number suggestion display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In FIG. 60 (F), it is shown that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. After that, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may be counted up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed as "super hot" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63, and when the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character suggesting a jackpot expectation may newly appear. , A new character suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. As a chance-up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D, other effects (such as other timer display number suggestion effects) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer display number suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed and the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed. After that, the timer display XA3 is performed. According to this configuration, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating, so that the player can look forward to the production in which the timer display appears. Since the timer display XA3 is performed after the timer display suggestion display XA2 is performed, when the timer display XA3 is displayed, it is possible to give an expectation for future development while paying attention to the remaining number of times of the timer display. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D, the timer display XA3 is displayed in the variable display area in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display XA3 can be focused on rather than the fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the player can have a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in the variable display area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timer number suggestion display XA2 rather than the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the timer display count suggestion effects A to D, the number of times the timer display suggested by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed in the first timer count suggestion display effect is 2 or more. According to this configuration, if the timer count suggestion display XA2 appears, the timer display will be performed a plurality of times, so that the player can pay more attention to the timer count suggestion display XA2. .. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the timer display count suggestion effects A to D, after the first timer count suggestion display effect, the first timer display effect is performed, then the second timer count suggestion display effect is performed, and the second timer count suggestion display is performed. In the effect, it is suggested that the timer number suggestion display XA2 displays the timer one less than the timer number suggestion display XA2 at the time of the first timer number suggestion display effect. That is, in the second timer count suggestion display effect, the "number of times the timer is displayed in the future" represented by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is "1", and in the first timer count suggestion display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 represents. The "number of times the timer is displayed in the future" is "2". According to this configuration, the "number of times the timer is displayed in the future" represented by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is subtracted by 1 each time the timer is displayed. Therefore, the "timer display is performed in the future" in the timer count suggestion display XA2. It is possible to accurately indicate the "number of times". As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the timer display number suggestion effects B to D, in the first timer display effect, the timer number display number suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed during the display of the timer display XA3. According to this configuration, the timer display XA3 and the timer count suggestion display XA2 are displayed. Therefore, while enjoying the timer effect of the timer display XA3, the timer count suggestion display XA2 gives a great expectation for the appearance of the next timer effect. Can be granted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the timer display number suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the timer display number suggestion effect of the game machine of the above embodiment,
[Modification 1]
In the timer display count suggestion display effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of times suggested by the timer count suggestion display XA2 in the first timer count suggestion display effect is "2". The number of times suggested by the timer number suggestion display XA2 may be 3 or more or 1. In the timer display count effect, the timer display for the number of times suggested by the timer count suggestion display XA2 is executed. For example, when the number of times suggested by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is "3", the timer display is executed three times thereafter.

[Modification 2]
In the timer display number suggestion display effect D, the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to cover the timer display area XA1 in the timer display effect, but the timer display during timer standby is also performed in the timer standby effect. It may be movable so as to cover the area XA1.

[Modification 3]
In the timer display count suggestion display effects A to D, the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed in the timer display area XA1, and the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed adjacent to each other. Not limited to this, the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 may be displayed differently.

[Modification example 4]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, when the timer value of the timer display XA3 reaches a predetermined value (zero), a chance-up effect is performed. You may try to produce. Predetermined productions include pseudo-continuous production, look-ahead production, zone production, reach production, super reach production, mini-game production, mission production, and the like.

[Modification 5]
In the timer display count suggestion display effects A to D, the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed on the fluctuation region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer count suggestion display is not limited to this. The XA2 and / or the timer display XA3 may be displayed in an area different from the variable area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varying the decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a timer.
The third display effect is an effect of performing a timer number suggestion display suggesting that the timer display is performed a predetermined number of times.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed and the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed and after the third display effect is performed. , The second display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is displayed in the decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1 or the aspect XA-2.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is displayed in the decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-3.
The predetermined number of times the timer is displayed in the third display effect is 2 or more.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
In the combination effect, if the second display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed again, and the third display effect is performed. The timer number suggestion display suggests that the timer is displayed one less than the predetermined number of times.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-5.
In the combination effect, the timer number suggestion display in the third display effect is continuously displayed during the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The timer count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. This timer count effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol that synchronizes with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), for example, special. It is executed at the start of the variable display of the symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, in this timer count effect, a display for counting the timer value using the timer image and each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined mode, or a specific image is predetermined. By changing to the mode of, it is an effect suggesting that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time.

[Timer count production A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A.
In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the reach effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 61 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement, and the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. A state in which the first movable accessory 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61B, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. 61 (A). In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and the back of the effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 61 (B), the characters and numbers of "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 61 (A) are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle. The image is displayed and the battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 61 (A). As with the reach production, each is waiting at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the count suggestion upper right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper right character effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is set. It shows the state of 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a is movable, and the first advance position is on the display screen 7a. Advance to. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a moves when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B) is counted down for 2 seconds. The first movable accessory 14a on the upper right is immediately evacuated to the home position after advancing to the first advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion upper right character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the count suggestion lower right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower right character effect, in the count suggestion upper right character effect shown in FIG. 61 (C), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 46. Indicates the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b is movable, and the second advance on the display screen 7a. Advance to the position. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b moves when the countdown is counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61 (C). Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b is larger than the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable accessory 14a shown in FIG. 61 (C). That is, the distance from the home position to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first advance position. The lower right first movable accessory 14b is immediately retracted to the home position after advancing to the second advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the count suggestion lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, in the count suggestion lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61 (D), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 44. Indicates the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c is movable, and the third advance position is on the display screen 7a. Advance to. That is, the lower left first movable accessory 14c moves when the countdown is counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 61 (D). Here, the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b shown in FIG. 61 (D). That is, the distance from the home position to the third advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first and second advance positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when it is located at the third advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 visibly changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. The lower left first movable accessory 14c is immediately retracted to the home position after advancing to the third advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the count suggestion upper left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper left character effect, in the count suggestion lower left character effect shown in FIG. 61 (E), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 44 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 42 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d is movable, and the fourth advance position is on the display screen 7a. Advance to. That is, the upper left first movable accessory 14d moves when the countdown is counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 61 (E). Here, the fluctuation range of the upper left first movable accessory 14d is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 61 (E). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first, second, and third advance positions. The upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when it is located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 visibly changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. The upper left first movable accessory 14d advances to the fourth advance position and then immediately evacuates to the home position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the count suggestion all-role effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion all-role effect, 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 42 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion upper left character effect shown in FIG. 61 (F), and the timer value was 40 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, all of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the count-suggested upper left accessory effects shown in FIG. 61 (F). It moves when it counts down for 2 seconds from the timer value. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, all the first movable accessories 14 move. .. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 are immediately evacuated to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion all-role effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the timer count effect A shown in FIG. 61, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example), the first movable accessory 14 as a movable body 14 Is movably controlled in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time the timer value as the starting point is counted for 2 seconds, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first. The movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move sequentially (clockwise), suggesting that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable accessories 14 can advance to four stages from the first advance position to the fourth advance position, and the upper right first movable accessory 14a is in the first advance position and the lower right first. 1 Movable accessory 14b is in the second advance position, lower left first movable accessory 14c is in the third advance position, upper left first movable accessory 14d is in the fourth advance position, and the fluctuation range is different on the display screen 7a. It is supposed to fluctuate like this. As a result, counting from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) is also possible for both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range. It is possible to suggest by. Further, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point, all of the first movable accessory 14 is movable, and the fourth advance on the display screen 7a. It is designed to advance to the position. As a result, it is also suggested by both the number of movable accessories and the fluctuation range that the timer is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point for a well-separated predetermined time (10 seconds). Is possible.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B.
In the timer count effect B, first, although not shown, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 61 (A). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C is in a fluctuating (scrolling) state. Further, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. Each of the first movable accessories 14 is located at the home position (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and the back of the effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 62 (A), the characters and numbers "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect are erased, and on the display screen 7a, an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are home positions, respectively, as in the reach effect. Waiting at (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), on the display screen 7a, the count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect is executed. In this count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62 (A), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value. Indicates a state in which is 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, among the first movable accessories 14 located in the home position, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessories 14a arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a. 1 The movable accessory 14c is movable, and advances to the first advance position on the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move in pairs when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62 (A) is counted down for 2 seconds. The upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c advance to the first advance position and then immediately evacuate to the home position. In addition, in this count suggestion upper right lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), on the display screen 7a, the count suggestion lower right upper left character effect is executed. In this count suggestion lower right upper left character effect, in the count suggestion upper right lower left character effect shown in FIG. 62 (B), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value. Indicates a state in which is 46 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, among the first movable accessories 14 located in the home position, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14d is movable, and advances to the second advance position on the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are movable in pairs when counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 62 (B). To do. Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d is from the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c shown in FIG. 62 (B). Is also getting bigger. That is, the distance from the home position to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first advance position. The lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d advance to the second advance position and then immediately evacuate to the home position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right upper left character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the count suggestion all-role effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion all-role effect, 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion lower right upper left character effect shown in FIG. 62 (C), and the timer value was set. It shows the state of 44 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, all of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are the count suggestion lower right upper left accessory shown in FIG. 62 (C). It moves when it counts down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the effect. Here, all the fluctuation widths of the first movable accessory 14 are larger than the fluctuation widths of the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d shown in FIG. 62 (C). That is, the distance from the home position to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home position to the first and second advance positions. The lower left first movable accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly cover a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when they are located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 visibly changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 are immediately evacuated to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. In addition, in this count suggestion all-role effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the jump count suggestion all-role effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jump count suggestion all accessory effect, the timer value displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion all accessory effect shown in FIG. 62 (D) is shown to be in a state of changing from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. .. That is, although 10 seconds have not actually passed since the count suggestion all-role effect shown in FIG. 62 (D) (actually, about 2 seconds have passed), the timer value suddenly changes from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. It shows the flying state. Then, when the timer value reaches 34 seconds, all of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position is movable, and fluctuates on the display screen 7a in a predetermined mode. The variation of this predetermined mode is performed as follows. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d immediately advance from the home position to the first advance position. The operation of retreating from the first advance position to the home position is repeated at high speed a predetermined number of times. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are homes as shown by arrows A, B, C, and D. It fluctuates in small steps for a predetermined time by going back and forth between the position and the first advance position. Here, in FIG. 62 (E), the first advanced position is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It should be noted that all the first movable accessories 14 are positioned in the home position when the change of this predetermined mode is completed. In addition, in this jump count suggestion all-role production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), on the display screen 7a, the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect is executed. In this long count suggestion upper right lower left bonus effect, 14 seconds have passed (countdown) since 34 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the jump count suggestion all role effect shown in FIG. In 20 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a are movable. , The state in which the display screen 7a is advanced to the first advance position is shown. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move in pairs when the timer value shown in FIG. 62 (F) reaches 20 seconds, and advance to the first advance position. Maintain its advanced state. In addition, in this long count suggestion upper right lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), on the display screen 7a, the long count suggestion lower right upper left character effect is executed. In this long count suggestion lower right upper left character effect, in the long count suggestion upper right lower left character effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), even though 2 seconds have passed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM. , Indicates a state in which the timer value is maintained for 20 seconds. Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 62 (F), the upper right first movable accessory 14a that advanced to the first advance position and maintained the advanced state. The lower left first movable accessory 14c is retracted to the home position. At the same time, among the first movable accessories 14 located in the home position, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a are movable. , Advance to the second advance position on the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs when 20 seconds have passed since 20 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and reach the second advance position. Advance and maintain the state of advance. In this long count suggestion lower right upper left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the long count suggestion all-role effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this long count suggestion all-role effect, 4 seconds have passed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the long count suggestion upper right and lower left character effects shown in FIG. 62 (F) (in FIG. 62 (G)). Shown long count suggestion Lower right upper left 2 seconds have passed since the character production was performed), but the timer value is maintained at 20 seconds. Then, when 4 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory production shown in FIG. 62 (F), the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d were maintained at the second position. Advance from the advance position to the 4th advance position. At the same time, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c, which were located in the home position, advance to the fourth advance position, respectively. That is, when 4 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion upper right lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 62 (F), the lower right first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs again. , The second advance position is further advanced to the fourth advance position to maintain the advance state, while the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c move in pairs again and the home. Advance from the position to the 4th advance position and maintain the advance state. As a result, all the first movable accessories 14, that is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14a are displayed on the display screen 7a. The object 14d advances to the fourth advance position and maintains the advance state. In this long count suggestion all-role effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. After that, although not shown, 2 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion all-role effect shown in FIG. 62 (H), that is, 6 seconds have passed from the long count suggestion upper right left lower character effect shown in FIG. At that time, all the first movable accessories 14 are evacuated to the home position from the maintained fourth advance position, and 14 seconds is displayed as a timer value on the timer image TM.

As described above, in the timer count effect B shown in FIG. 62, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example), the first movable body is composed of a plurality of movable bodies. Two predetermined movable bodies of the movable accessory 14 are movably controlled in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time the timer value as the starting point is counted for 2 seconds, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower left first movable accessory 14c, or the lower right The first movable accessory 14b and the upper left first movable accessory 14d move in pairs, suggesting that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, the paired upper right first movable accessory 14a, lower left first movable accessory 14c, lower right first movable accessory 14b, and upper left first movable accessory 14d have different fluctuation widths on the display screen 7a. It is supposed to fluctuate like this. As a result, it is also suggested by both the movable accessory and its fluctuation range that the timer is counted for a predetermined time (2, 4 seconds) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. Is possible. In addition, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the timer value is counted in a time shorter than the actual elapsed time, or when the timer value is counted in a time longer than the actual elapsed time. When the above is performed, the movable body is adapted to move in a special variation mode (FIGS. 62 (E), 62 (F) to (H)). This makes it possible to suggest that the timer value is counted at a time different from the actual elapsed time by moving the movable body in a special variable mode.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C.
In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the reach effect is executed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, indicating that the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown in this reach symbol arrangement, and the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, in this reach effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. The state in which the first movable accessory 14 is located at the home position (origin) is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63B, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (A). In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and the back of the effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 63 (B), the characters and numbers of "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (A) are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. The image is displayed and the battle effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 63 (A). As with the reach production, each is waiting at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the count suggestion upper right character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper right character effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is set. It shows the state of 48 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, of the first movable accessory 14 located in the home position, only the upper right first movable accessory 14a is movable, and the fourth advance position is on the display screen 7a. Advance to. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a moves when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B) is counted down for 2 seconds, advances to the fourth advance position, and maintains the advance state. In addition, in this count suggestion upper right character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the count suggestion lower right accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower right character effect, in the count suggestion upper right character effect shown in FIG. 63 (C), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 48 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 46. Indicates the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable accessory 14b of the first movable accessory 14 is movable, and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable accessory 14b moves when the timer value of the count suggestion upper right accessory effect shown in FIG. 63 (C) is counted down for 2 seconds, and advances to the fourth advance position to enter the advanced state. maintain. As a result, among the first movable accessories 14, the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b advanced to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a and maintained the advanced state. It becomes a state. In addition, in this count suggestion lower right character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the count suggestion lower left accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion lower left accessory effect, in the count suggestion lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 63 (D), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 44. Indicates the state of seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable accessory 14c of the first movable accessory 14 is movable, and the display screen 7a advances to the fourth advance position. That is, the lower left first movable accessory 14c moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower right accessory effect shown in FIG. 63 (D), advances to the fourth advance position, and enters the advanced state. maintain. As a result, among the first movable accessories 14, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first movable accessory 14c advance to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. Then, the state of advancement is maintained. Further, the lower left first movable accessory 14c visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when it is located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 visibly changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the count suggestion upper left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggestion upper left character effect, in the count suggestion lower left character effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 44 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was 42 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Then, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable accessory 14d of the first movable accessory 14 is movable, and advances to the fourth advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the upper left first movable accessory 14d moves when it is counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion lower left accessory effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), advances to the fourth advance position, and maintains the advanced state. To do. As a result, all the first movable accessories 14, that is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14a are displayed on the display screen 7a. The object 14d advances to the fourth advance position and maintains the advance state. Further, the upper left first movable accessory 14d visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when it is located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable accessory 14 visibly changes the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the count suggestion first and second accessory effects are executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggestion 1st and 2nd character effects, 2 seconds have passed (countdown) since 42 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion upper left character effect shown in FIG. 63 (F), and the timer value. Indicates a state in which is 40 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the second movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1) located in the home position advances to the center advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves when the countdown is counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper left accessory effect shown in FIG. 63 (F). That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, all the first movable accessories 14 are fourth. In the state of advancing to the advancing position, the second movable accessory 15 moves and advances to the central advancing position substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the central advance position, the second movable accessory 15 has the upper right first movable accessory 14a and the lower right first movable accessory 14b on the right side and the lower left first movable accessory 14b on the left side. It is located between the accessory 14c and the upper left first movable accessory 14d, that is, it is stopped at a position that does not overlap with all the first movable accessories 14, and the timer image display area TMH and a part of the battle effect are visually recognized. It covers impossible (timer image TM is not covered). In addition, in the count suggestion 1st and 2nd character productions, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 immediately evacuates to the home position after advancing to the central advance position. At the same time, all the first movable accessories 14 that have advanced to the fourth advance position are evacuated to the home position. In addition, in this count suggestion lower left character production, the battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the timer count effect C shown in FIG. 63, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds in this example), the first movable combination of different types as a movable body is used. The object 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are movably controlled in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every time the timer value as the starting point is counted for 2 seconds, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, and the lower left first. The movable accessory 14c, the upper left first movable accessory 14d, and the second movable accessory 15 are sequentially moved, suggesting that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable accessories 14 sequentially advances to a predetermined advance position (fourth advance position), and then maintains the advance state until the second movable accessory 15 moves. As a result, counting from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point for a predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) is also possible for both the movable accessory and its advanced state. It is possible to suggest by. Further, every time 10 seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point, all the first movable accessories 14 advance to a predetermined advance position (fourth advance position). In this state, the second movable accessory 15 is movable so as to advance to a predetermined advance position (center advance position). As a result, the type of movable accessory and its advance state are also counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point for a well-separated predetermined time (10 seconds). It is possible to suggest by both of.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D.
In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 64 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the four corners of the display screen 7a are composed of the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d. Each of the first movable accessories 14 to be moved is located at the home position (origin) (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the timer / character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer / character display effect, the character image CA1 as a specific image is displayed in the character image display area CAH in the left center of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64 (A). In the character image display area CAH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and the back of the effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Further, a timer image TM is displayed on the lower right side in front of the character image display area CAH. The timer image TM is displayed so as to straddle the character image display area CAH and the effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a and cover a part of the character image display area CAH (character image CA1). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 64 (B), the characters and numbers of "50 seconds left" indicating 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer / character display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64 (A) are erased, and on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side. An image of a battle with and is displayed, and a battle effect is executed. In this timer / character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 64 (A). Similar to the reach production shown, each is waiting at the home position (origin).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the character fade-out effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character fade-out effect is the timer / character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (B). Immediately after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, the character image CA1 fades out with the passage of time (not shown). , The character image CA1 is shown by a wavy line). Further, in this character fade-out effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are shown in FIG. 64 (B). Similar to the timer / character display effect, they are waiting at the home position (origin). In this character fade-out effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the count suggestion character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggestion character erasing accessory effect is the timer / character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (B), and one second has elapsed (countdown) after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM. It shows the state where the timer value has reached 49 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the timer value count is subtracted by 1 second at the timing when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, the character image CA1 becomes difficult to see every second, and the timer image TM is switched at the timing when it becomes difficult to see. Further, since the character image CA1 fades out from a visible display mode to a display mode that is difficult to see in 1 second, the visual state of the character image CA1 during this period suggests the number of seconds of the timer value of 1 second or less. ing. Further, in this count suggestion character erasing character effect effect, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, all the first movable characters 14 located in the home position are movable, and the second advance on the display screen 7a. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are timers for the timer / character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (B). It moves when it is counted down for 1 second from the value. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 are immediately evacuated to the home position after advancing to the second advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion character erasing character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the timer / multi-character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The timer / plural character display effect is the count suggestion character erasing accessory shown in FIG. 64 (D), and is an effect performed immediately after the character image CA1 is erased. In this timer / multi-character display effect, character images CA1 and CA2 as specific images are generated in the character image display area CAH. That is, a plurality of character images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. In this timer / multi-character display effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are home positions (origins), respectively. ), And the battle effect is still being executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the count suggestion character reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggestion character reduction effect is the count suggestion character erasing accessory effect shown in FIG. 64 (D). One second elapses (counts down) after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 48 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Although not shown, only the character image CA2 of the character images CA1 and CA2 fades out with the passage of time while 1 second has elapsed since 49 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM. Then, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the character image CA2 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the timer value count is subtracted by 1 second at the timing when the character image CA2 disappears. In this count suggestion character reduction effect, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are home positions (origins), respectively. The battle effect is still being executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the count suggestion character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggestion character erasing accessory effect is the count suggestion character reduction effect shown in FIG. 64 (F), and one second has elapsed (countdown) after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 47 seconds. It shows the state of becoming. Although not shown, the character image CA1 fades out with the passage of time while 1 second elapses after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM. Then, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely erased. That is, the timer value count is subtracted by 1 second at the timing when the character image CA1 disappears. In other words, when 2 seconds have passed since 49 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, both the character images CA1 and CA2 are completely erased, and the timer value count is 2 at the timing when both the character images CA1 and CA2 disappear. Seconds are subtracted. That is, the timer value count is subtracted by the number of seconds of the erased character image (for example, if three character images are erased, the timer value count is subtracted by 3 seconds). Further, in this count suggestion character erasing character effect effect, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, all the first movable characters 14 located in the home position are movable, and the fourth advance on the display screen 7a. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable accessory 14a, the lower right first movable accessory 14b, the lower left first movable accessory 14c, and the upper left first movable accessory 14d are timers for the count suggestion character reduction effect shown in FIG. 64 (F). It moves when it counts down for 1 second from the value. In addition, all the first movable accessories 14 are immediately evacuated to the home position after advancing to the fourth advancing position. Further, in this count suggestion character erasing character effect, the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after all the first movable accessories 14 shown in FIG. 64 (G) have returned to the home position, the timer image TM, the character image display area CAH, and the battle effect displayed on the display screen 7a are performed. The screen of is switched to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 64 (A), indicating that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, in this reach effect, a plurality of character images are displayed in the timer / multi-character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) and the count suggestion character erasing accessory effect shown in FIG. 64 (G). This is done when all the first movable accessories 14 advance to the fourth advance position, that is, multiple character images are displayed and the first movable accessory 14 advances to the fourth advance position. , It is a chance up production.

As described above, in the timer count effect D shown in FIG. 64, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (every time the timer value is counted for 1 second in this example), the character image as a specific image is set in a predetermined mode. It is supposed to change to. That is, for example, the display mode in which the character image can be recognized changes to a display mode in which the character image is difficult to see, from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or within 1 second from the timer value as the starting point. .. Moreover, when the character image changes to a display mode that is difficult to see, all the first movable accessories 14 advance to a predetermined advance position. As a result, counting from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point for a predetermined time (1 second) is a change in the display mode of the character image as a specific image and a predetermined accessory. It is possible to suggest by both of the movement of. Further, a plurality of character images are displayed, and the advance position of the first movable accessory 14 is changed. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation of fluctuation of the decorative pattern depending on the number of character images displayed and the advancing position of the movable accessory.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured so that the movable body is movably controlled in a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. Further, the movable body is formed of a highly transparent member, and is configured so that the timer value can be visually moved regardless of how the movement is controlled. According to this configuration, the player can count for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point by simply looking at the moving body without paying attention to the timer value. You will be able to understand. As a result, the player has a timer value that is likely to be given an advantageous privilege in a production in which an advantageous privilege is easily given (the jackpot expectation is increased) when the player is counted up to a specific timer value, for example. Becomes easy to understand. Further, by moving the movable body in various modes, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting not only the timer value but also the giving of advantageous benefits (big hit expectation). For example, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies may be moved in a predetermined mode, or at least two or more movable bodies among the plurality of movable bodies may be moved in a predetermined mode. It is also possible to do it. As a result, the player can gaze with a sense of expectation as to which of the plurality of movable bodies has moved, or how many of the plurality of movable bodies have moved. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, a plurality of movable bodies are sequentially (clockwise) movable, and each of the movable bodies is movable. It is configured so that the fluctuation range from the home position at that time is different. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point by both the movable movable body and its fluctuation range. It has become. Further, every time a specific number of seconds are counted, all the movable bodies move, and the movable body advances to the advance position having the largest fluctuation range. As a result, a specific number of seconds (for example, the number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good delimiter) is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point of the movable movable body. It is possible to suggest by both the number and its fluctuation range. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one of the plurality of paired movable bodies is moved, and the paired movable body is movable. Moreover, the plurality of pairs of movable bodies are configured so that the fluctuation range from the home position when they are moved for each pair is different. According to this configuration, it is suggested by both the movable paired movable body and the fluctuation range thereof that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value which is the starting point. Will be possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when the timer value is counted in a time shorter than the actual elapsed time, or when the timer value is actually counted. When the timer value is counted for a time longer than the elapsed time, the movable body is configured to move in a special variable mode. According to this configuration, when it is suggested that an advantageous privilege is given (big hit expectation) in such a special effect in the timer count effect, the movable body has a special variable mode different from the normal variable mode. Since it is movable, this makes it easy for the player to see that the movable body has a special variation mode, and that the suggestion of giving an advantageous privilege has been made. That is, the player will pay attention to whether or not the movable body can move in a special variable mode with a sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, a plurality of movable bodies are sequentially (clockwise) movable, and each of the plurality of movable bodies is movable. After sequentially advancing to a predetermined advancing position, the advancing state is maintained until all the movable bodies move. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point by both the movable movable body and its advanced state. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 63, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to move different types of movable bodies at the same time each time a specific number of seconds are counted. According to this configuration, it is possible that a specific number of seconds (for example, the number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good delimiter) is counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value that is the starting point. It is possible to suggest by the type of movable body. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to change the character image as a specific image to a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. More specifically, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the character image as a specific image is configured to change from a visible display mode to a display mode that is difficult to see. According to this configuration, it is suggested by changing the display mode of the character image as a specific image that the timer is counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. Becomes possible. Further, when the character image changes to a display mode that is difficult to see, the movable body advances to a predetermined advance position. As a result, the fact that the timer was counted for a predetermined time from the timer value when the timer was displayed or from the timer value as the starting point is suggested by both the change in the display mode of the character image as a specific image and the movement of the movable body. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the movable body is arranged so as to be visible to the player when it is located in the home position, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the movable body may be arranged invisible to the player when it is located in the home position. Alternatively, only a specific movable accessory among the plurality of movable bodies may be arranged so as to be visible to the player. With this configuration, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the movable body suddenly appears from a position invisible to the player, so that the movement of the movable body can be impressed on the player, and as a result, the game It is possible to improve the interest of. Further, the movable bodies are provided at the four corners of the display screen, but this is not limited, and for example, the movable bodies may be provided symmetrically in the vertical and horizontal directions other than the four corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the reach effect are erased in the timer display effect, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in the timer display effect, the reach symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed behind the movable bodies (upper right first movable accessory 14a and upper left first movable accessory 14d) located in the home position. You may try to do it. In this case, the entire reach symbol may be displayed on the rear side of the movable body. With this configuration, the movable body is highly transparent, so that it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable body and the reach pattern are related to each other, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the effect displayed in place of the decorative symbol in the timer display effect does not have to be a battle effect, and may be, for example, a step-up effect or a story effect.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, a timer image composed of letters and numbers is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed only by numbers. In addition, the timer image may be displayed in various fonts and colors to indicate the degree of expectation that the privilege will be given in those fonts and colors. Further, although the timer image shows the one displayed by the countdown method in which the timer value counts down, this may be displayed by the countup method in which the timer value counts up.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is made to move every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds, but the movable body has a timer value other than 2 seconds. It may be movable every time it is counted in time. Further, as shown in FIG. 64, when one character image is displayed, the character image is deleted every time the timer value is counted for 1 second, and when two are displayed, the timer value is counted for 2 seconds. The character image is erased each time it is erased, but the time for erasing this character image can be set arbitrarily.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when a plurality (two) of character images as specific images are displayed, one is displayed every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Although it is erased one by one, a plurality (two) may be erased together every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Further, when the character images are erased one by one, the displayed character image may be associated with the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the order in which the character images are erased. For example, when a character image having a low jackpot expectation disappears before a character image having a high jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when it disappears later.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the timer image is displayed in the timer image display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the timer image display area so as to straddle the timer image display area and the effect screen being displayed according to the display mode of the timer image shown in FIG. Good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
Movable movable body and
A control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined mode,
A display means that can execute multiple display effects,
It is a game machine equipped with
The display means displays a predetermined timer image as one of the plurality of display effects, and performs an effect including a display of counting the timer value using the timer image.
The control means may movably control the movable body in a predetermined mode each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-2]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
Every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, any one of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
[Aspect A3-3]
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
Every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, at least two or more movable bodies among the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1 or the aspect A3-2.
[Aspect A3-4]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including a display of displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image.
The second effect is an effect of changing a specific image into a predetermined mode.
The display means may change the specific image in a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-5]
The display means may change the display mode from a visible display mode to a display mode in which the specific image is difficult to see each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-4.

The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. This timer effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol that synchronizes with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), for example, the special symbol. It is executed at the start of the variation display of, at the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, this timer effect is an effect including a display for counting the timer value using a timer image and a display for stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value, and the timer value is stopped or digested at a predetermined value. This is an effect of simultaneously displaying a specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode when the display effect is performed.

[Timer production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside is displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 65 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the characters "victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 65 (A), are displayed in large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65C, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in the left center of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 65 (A). The timer image display area TMH is displayed on the display screen 7a where a part of the effect screen (variable display screen of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked) and can be seen from the torn area. It is formed on the back side (rear side) of the production screen inside. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65 (C), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (expectation degree of the jackpot type) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is suggested. In FIG. 65 (E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 65 (E), and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the granting of advantageous benefits to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (including the jackpot type expectation degree) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ) Is suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the character MLG is composed of the same characters as the character MKE, and is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE larger than the character MKE, and a part thereof is displayed by the character MKE. Covered readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantially center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part of them is displayed in a manner that can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 65 (F) is switched. That is, the characters MLG and the characters MKE shown in FIG. 65 (F) are erased, and the reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7".

[Timer production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside is displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 66 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66B, the timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the characters "victory!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 66 (A) are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in the left center of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 66 (A). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C) is counted down to 5 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the timer value is stopped in the middle. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped in 5 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (expectation degree of the jackpot type) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is suggested. In FIG. 66 (E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 66 (E), and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters MLG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the granting of advantageous benefits to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (including the jackpot type expectation degree) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ) Is suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the character MLG is composed of the same characters as the character MKE, and is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE larger than the character MKE, and a part thereof is displayed by the character MKE. Covered readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantially center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part of them is displayed in a manner that can be read by the characters MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image independent effect, of the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 66 (F), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed independently on the display screen 7a. To. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposition effect to an oblique shape (downward to the right), and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entire character MLG, the player can completely see the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the granting of advantageous benefits to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. You can grasp it and have great expectations for further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 66 (G) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 66 (G) is erased, and the reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7".

[Timer production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol display area is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 67 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67 (A), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67 (A) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (expectation degree of the jackpot type) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is suggested. In FIG. 67C, the character MKE “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. The characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to giving advantageous benefits to the player, and the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific images (characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3). (Including the expectation level of the jackpot type) (the jackpot expectation level: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from the characters MKE (the character MSG1 "super heat", the character MSG2 "pending change", and the character MSG3 "NEXT"). And is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE in almost the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and if they overlap with the character MKE during movement, part or all of them pass behind the character MKE and become the character MKE. It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67 (C), and instead of the erased characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3, a specific image is produced. The characters MLG are displayed in the effect image display area EGH. This character MLG is the same character as the character MKE, is displayed behind the character MKE in a larger size than the character MKE, and a part thereof is readablely covered by the character MKE. That is, the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE (for example, 3 to 5 times) in the substantially center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH, and the timer image display area. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part of them is displayed in a manner that can be read by the characters MKE. That is, in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67 (C)), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed as specific images do not have the same characters (“chance”) as the characters MKE, and the subsequent specific image superimposition effect (“chance”) In FIG. 67 (D)), the character MLG as a specific image of the same character as the character MKE is displayed instead of the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3. In this way, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is the highest (big hit expectation: character). MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the specific image independent effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image independent effect, of the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (D), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed independently on the display screen 7a. To. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG changes from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposition effect to an oblique shape (downward to the right), and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entire character MLG, the player can completely see the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the granting of advantageous benefits to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. You can grasp it and have great expectations for further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the probability variation reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probabilistic reach effect, the screen of the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 67 (E) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 67 (E) is erased, and the probability variation reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop at the reach symbol arrangement of the probability variation jackpot is executed on the display screen 7a. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific image superimposition effect, it is assumed that "NEXT" is displayed as the character MLG as shown in FIG. 67 (G) instead of FIG. 67 (D). That is, in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67 (C), and the erased characters MSG1 and MSG2 are deleted. , Instead of MSG3, the character MLG is displayed in the effect image display area EGH as a specific image. This character MLG is not the same character as the character MKE (“chance”), but is displayed as an enlarged display (for example, 3 to 5 times) of the character MSG3 (“NEXT”). That is, in this specific image superimposition effect, MSG3 is selected from the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67 (C)), and the character MLG is behind the timer image display area TMH. In the substantially center of the effect image display area EGH located in, it is displayed larger than the character MKE. In this way, when a character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the variation is compared with the case where the same character MLG is displayed. The jackpot expectation is low (big hit expectation: character MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE, the player cannot expect much from the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), a normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image independent effect shown in FIG. 67 (E) is performed as an effect that gives the player expectations. However, when the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image single effect is omitted and the normal reach effect shown in FIG. 67 (H) is executed. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G) is switched, and on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array of the normal jackpot. Will be executed. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game is completed, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times. It is a big hit that the game state becomes a low accuracy low base state (low accuracy high base state), and thereafter it becomes a low accuracy low base state (normal state).

[Timer production D]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol display area is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66C, 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown. When the timer image TM is displayed, a battle effect is performed in the center of the display screen 7a instead of displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Although the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not shown, they are displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 68 (A) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the timer value is digested. It is shown. Further, on the display screen 7a, the battle effect is continuously performed. In this battle effect, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68C, the timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree (expectation degree of the jackpot type) of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). (Including) is suggested. In FIG. 68C, the character MKE “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and instead of the erased decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. The characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to giving advantageous benefits to the player, and the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation depends on the type of the specific images (characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3). (Including the expectation level of the jackpot type) (the jackpot expectation level: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from the characters MKE (the character MSG1 "participation", the character MSG2 "hold change", and the character MSG3 "NEXT"). In addition to being configured, it is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE in almost the same size as the character MKE. These characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move their display positions so as to rotate in a predetermined direction, and if they overlap with the character MKE during movement, part or all of them pass behind the character MKE and become the character MKE. It is displayed in a covered manner. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG2 and MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 68 (C), and the character MSG1 (“participation”) is enlarged and displayed at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. To. That is, the character MSG1 is displayed in the effect image display area EGH after the display mode is changed to the character MLG as a specific image. Further, the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH changes from "chance" to "participation" and is enlarged and displayed. That is, the character MKE as the first display mode of the specific image and the character MLG as the second display mode of the specific image are displayed with the same character. Thus, the character MLG is displayed behind the character MKE in a larger size than the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is readablely covered by the character MKE. That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE in the substantially center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 2). ~ 3 times), the timer image display area TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part of them is displayed in a manner that can be read by the characters MKE. In this way, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is the highest (big hit expectation: character). MLG> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, and by displaying the originally displayed character in the same character as the character MLG by changing and enlarging the character MKE, the player can perform the subsequent characters. You can have even more expectations with the development of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the specific image character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image character effect, of the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 68 (D), the character MKE is erased and only the character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the timer image display area TMH is erased. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG is changed from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposition effect to an oblique shape (downward to the right), and the characters MLG are entirely displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the name CNA (“OARO”) of the character CRC is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This character CRC is displayed based on the fact that "participation" is displayed as the character MLG, and in the above battle effect (FIG. 68 (B)), the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. It is a character to battle. There are a plurality of types of character CRCs displayed in this specific image character effect, and the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation (including the jackpot expectation of the jackpot type) is suggested depending on the type of the character CRC. The "OARO" as the character CRC displayed here is a character with a relatively high expectation of a big hit. By displaying the entire character MLG, the player can completely see the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the granting of advantageous benefits to the player, and more accurately the current game state can be displayed. With the advent of the character CRC "OARO", which can be grasped and has a relatively high expectation for big hits, it is possible to have great expectations for further development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the probability variation reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probabilistic reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) is switched. That is, the character MLG, the character CRC, and the name CNA shown in FIG. Will be done. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific image character effect, it is assumed that the name CNA (“ZERO”) is displayed as the character CRC as shown in FIG. 68 (G) instead of FIG. 68 (E). "ZERO" as this character CRC is a character having a relatively low jackpot expectation, and has a lower jackpot expectation than the above "OARO". That is, the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is changed from the display state of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) to a character CRC instead of the character "OARO" having a relatively high expectation of big hit. The character "ZERO" with a relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed. In this way, by displaying the character CRC with a relatively low jackpot expectation in the specific image character production, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is switched, and on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement of the normal jackpot. Will be executed. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In this example, the jackpot symbol array "888" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game is completed, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times. It is a big hit that the game state becomes a low accuracy low base state (low accuracy high base state), and thereafter it becomes a low accuracy low base state (normal state).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first effect displays a predetermined timer image, counts the timer value using the timer image, and displays the timer value. It is an effect including a display of stopping or digesting at a predetermined value, and the second effect is an effect including display of a specific image related to giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the timer value is set to a predetermined value in the first effect. When the display effect to be stopped or digested is performed, the specific image is displayed at the same time in the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value is stopped or digested at a predetermined value, a specific image related to giving a favorable privilege to the player is displayed, so that the player can increase the timer value that changes every moment. You can enjoy the game while watching with expectation. Further, since the specific image is displayed at the same time in the first display mode and the second display mode, the degree of expectation of the player for the subsequent development of the game can be changed by changing the combination of the display modes in various ways. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be delighted. Further, it is also possible to associate the stopped timer value with a specific image and change the player's expectation depending on the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which the specific image is displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image. The second display mode of the above is a display mode in which a part displayed behind the timer image is covered with the specific image of the first display mode. According to this configuration, the player can guess the specific image displayed in the second display mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image is a predetermined character, and the same character is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image. The characters in the second display mode, which are display modes and are partially covered by the characters in the first display mode, are configured to be readable. According to this configuration, although the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode are partially covered, the characters are the same as the characters displayed in the first display mode, and the display mode is readable. Therefore, the player can accurately guess the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode and enjoy the game with great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the characters of the first display mode are erased, the display mode of the characters of the second display mode is changed and displayed as a whole. It is configured. According to this configuration, the characters in the second display mode that are partially covered are displayed in their entirety, so that the player verifies whether or not the characters in the second display mode that he / she inferred are accurate. Can be done. Further, since the display mode of the characters in the second display mode changes when the characters are displayed as a whole, it is possible to change the player's expectation by changing the display mode in various ways, for example. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to display the decorative symbol in the reach state when the entire display of the second display mode is erased. According to this configuration, when the characters in the second display mode are entirely displayed, the reach is always reached, so that the player is delighted and uneasy depending on whether or not the characters in the second display mode are entirely displayed. Further, it is also possible to associate the characters in the second display mode with the jackpot expectation and change the jackpot expectation depending on the characters in the second display mode displayed as a whole. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, a specific image displayed in the timer image display area instead of the timer value displays a predetermined character, but the present invention has the present invention. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be an image of a symbol, a mark, a pattern, a character, or an object or an article having a specific shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the timer display effect, the timer value is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the timer display effect, the timer value may change irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. Further, in the timer display effect, 10 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer, but this is not limited to 10 seconds and is arbitrary. Further, in the timer stop effect shown in FIG. 66, the timer image change effect is executed when the timer value is stopped in 5 seconds, but this is not limited to 5 seconds and is arbitrary.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the specific image independent effect (FIGS. 65 and 66) or the specific image character effect (FIG. 68) is executed from the specific image superimposition effect, Characters as a specific image are displayed as a whole by changing the display mode diagonally (downward to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode may be changed to an arc shape, a vertical shape, a zigzag shape, or the like instead of an oblique shape so that the entire display is performed. Then, in this case, the color may also be changed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes may be changed, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which type the display mode changes.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the timer image change effect, three characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images in the effect image display area. The invention is not limited to this. For example, these specific images may be other than three, and may be at least two or more. Further, these specific images may be other than characters, and may be images of symbols, marks, patterns, characters, or objects or articles having a specific shape. Further, in these specific images, the same image (for example, "chance") as the specific image displayed in the timer image display area may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, one character participates in the specific image character production, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image character production, a plurality of characters may participate in the war. In addition, the participating characters battle with the enemy character CRB together with the player's ally character CRA, but on the contrary, they may battle with the player's ally character CRA together with the enemy character CRB. You may. In this case, a plurality of character colors of the character MLG of "participation in the war" may be provided, and whether the participating character is attached to the ally character CRA or the enemy character CRB may be determined according to the character color.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including a display of displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image, and a display of stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value.
The second effect is an effect including the display of a specific image related to the imparting of advantageous benefits to the player.
The display means displays the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect when the display effect in which the timer value is stopped or digested at a predetermined value is performed in the first effect. Perform the effect of displaying at the same time with
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A4-2]
The first display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which the timer image is displayed in place of the timer image at the display position of the timer image.
The second display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which a part displayed behind the timer image is partially covered by the specific image of the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
[Aspect A4-3]
The specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image are display modes in which the same characters are displayed.
The characters in the second display mode, which are partially covered by the characters in the first display mode, are readable display modes.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-2.
[Aspect A4-4]
When the characters in the first display mode are erased, the characters in the second display mode change and are displayed as a whole.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-3.
[Aspect A4-5]
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means that can display variable display of decorative patterns,
When the entire display of the second display mode is erased, the decorative symbol display means displays the decorative symbol in a reach state.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-4.

The image transparent display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. This transparent image display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image transparency display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Image transparent display effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect A. As shown in FIG. 69A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the image transparent display effect A, a specific image (Ikuze image) IZ of "SMILE Ikuze !!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation effect. This image becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17 in a state where the image IZ is displayed. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the smile image IZ of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and are visually recognized. Superimposition production that becomes possible is performed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69 (C) to 69 (E), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done.

In the second aspect in which the first movable accessory 14 has been moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of The continuous image IZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. The displayed composite effect is executed. At this time, since the Ikuze image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a moves in the display screen 7a and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes, the character image MJ, the Ikuze image IZ, Two or three of the smile images SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69 (F) and 69 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the effect is performed in which each of the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. In addition, a plurality of IZ images IZ on the display screen 7a may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or may be displayed as a single image, and each may move or stop. As a result, two or three of the character image MJ, the Ikuze image IZ, and the smile image SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (J), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state for each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

[Image transparent display effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect B. As shown in FIG. 70A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the image transparent display effect B, the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a when the variable display is being executed. The timer image TM1 becomes visible via the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the timer image TM1 is started immediately after it is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17 that are different from each other. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap to be visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (C) to 70 (E), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 70 (D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done.

In the second aspect in which the first movable accessory 14 has been moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. The compound effect to be performed is executed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. In the character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL, two or three of these sometimes overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (F) and 70 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the effect is performed in which each of the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. Further, the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL. The ones sometimes overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (H) to 70 (J), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state for each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed, the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 is displayed. Will be done. After that, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect C. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the image transparent display effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the decorative symbol repeats the variable display and the stop display, and here, the stopped display state is shown. In this way, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol repeats the variable display and the stop display. Here, the timer image TM1 is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. The timer image TM1 becomes visible via the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit numerical image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numerical image. Here, the countdown of the timer image TM1 is started immediately after it is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds. That is, "30" means 30 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), after the stop display of the decorative symbol, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, the decorative pattern or timer image TM1 that is stopped and displayed and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap to be visible. Is done. As shown in FIG. 71 (D), the stopped-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display starts.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 71 (C) and 71 (D), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is "5", the value "4" to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value "5". In FIG. 70 (D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” which overlaps with the current timer value “5” and has transparency is enlarged and displayed. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 can be visually recognized via the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is enlarged and displayed, it is larger than the timer image TM1 and the upper and lower ends of the number "4" are images that protrude from the display screen 7a. The next timer value image NT is reduced in a state of overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size and the display position of the timer image TM1 approach the portion (image area) where the counter value is represented. Then, when the next timer value image NT substantially matches the size and display position of the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, the decrementation of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing "4" is reduced so that the size and display position match the "5" part of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT "4" and the timer image are reduced. Immediately after the size and position of the TM1 “5” match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with the “4”.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) and 71 (E), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 71 (D), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done.

In the second aspect in which the first movable accessory 14 has been moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. The compound effect to be performed is executed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues the countdown, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL are sometimes visible by overlapping two or three of them.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71 (F) and 71 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the effect is performed in which each of the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" is randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at random positions on the light guide plate 17. Further, the timer image TM1 of the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL. The ones sometimes overlap and become visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71 (H) to 71 (J), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state for each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when the timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed, the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 is displayed. Will be done. After that, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Image transparent display effect D]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the image transparent display effect D. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the image transparent display effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 72 (D), the stop-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative symbol explodes and disappears as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 72 (F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. These effects are the same as the image transparent display effect C. That is, in the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. When the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. In the second aspect in which the first movable accessory 14 has been moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of The display screen 7a continuously displays the variable display of the decorative pattern, the first movable accessory 14 continuously displays the character image MJ, and the light guide plate 17 continuously displays the smile image SL at a random position. Is displayed. The compound effect is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of these, the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL, sometimes overlap and become visible. After that, the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without going through the first movable accessory 14 (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 72 (J), the stopped-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display starts. In the above, it is assumed that the display is performed over a plurality of fluctuation displays, but it may be performed with one fluctuation. That is, it may be performed at the time of pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 72 (B) and FIG. 72 (H) may be a temporary stop display.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image transparent display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the light guide plate 17 that can switch the smile image SL between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, and a character image MJ that is visible and difficult to see. A first movable accessory 14 that can be switched to a normal state is provided, and the light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the character image MJ represented by the first movable accessory 14 is transmitted through the light guide plate 17. It is possible to execute an image transparent display effect that makes the image visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmission display effect, the character image MJ represented by the first movable accessory 14 can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17. An effect that makes the smile image SL visible on the light guide plate 17 is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the smile image SL represented on the light guide plate 17 and the character image MJ represented on the first movable accessory 14 are used for the image transmission display effect. Includes effects that overlap and become visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmission display effect, the smile image SL is alternately visible and difficult to see at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17. Includes repetitive effects. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable, and in the image transparency display effect, the first movable character image MJ is visible. The effect that the movable accessory 14 moves is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable accessory 14 has transparency, and the gaming machine 1 further visually recognizes the image IZ as being visible. A display screen 7a that can be switched to a difficult state is provided, and in the image transmission display effect, the image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a is visually recognized via the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. Includes productions that will be possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light guide plate 17 capable of switching the smile image SL between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, and the timer image TM1 are visible and difficult to see. A display screen 7a that can be switched to a normal state is provided, and the light guide plate 17 has transparency, and an image in which the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17. A transparent display effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image transparent display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, it is assumed that the image IZ is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, on the display screen 7a, an image having a content different from that of the Ikuze image IZ may be displayed in the same manner as the Ikuze image IZ. For example, it may be a specific character image, a specific character, a figure, a symbol, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the respective image transparent display effects of FIGS. 69 to 72 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the image transparent display effect A of FIG. 69, the variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 72 and the explosion effect after the smile image SL display may be combined. Further, the timer image TM1 of FIGS. 70 and 71 may be displayed on the image transparent display effect D of FIG. 72.
[Modification 3]
In the image transparent display effect of FIGS. 70 and 71, the timer value of the timer image TM1 is assumed to be finally zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM1 may end at a value other than zero. For example, the first expectation suggestion image EI1 may be displayed after the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2). In the image transparent display effect of FIGS. 70 and 71, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification example 4]
In the image transmission display effect of FIGS. 69 to 72, the smile image SL and the timer image TM1 are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A first image display area in which the first image can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, and
A gaming machine including a second image display area in which the second image can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.
The first image display area has transparency, and it is possible to execute a specific effect in which the second image represented in the second image display area becomes visible through the first image display area. A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
In the specific effect, the first image is visually recognized in the first image display area while the second image represented in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area. A game machine characterized by including possible effects.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
The specific effect includes an effect in which the first image represented in the first image display area and the second image represented in the second image display area overlap and become visible. A game machine to be.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3.
The specific effect includes an effect of alternately repeating a state in which the first image is visible and a state in which the first image is difficult to see at a plurality of different positions in the first image area.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4.
The second image display area is configured to be movable.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect includes an effect in which the movement of the second image display area is moved while the second image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5.
The second image display area has transparency and is transparent.
The game machine further
It is equipped with a third image display area that can switch the third image between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.
The specific effect includes an effect that makes the third image represented in the third image display area visible through the first image display area and the second image display area. A game machine to play.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4.
The second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a timer image.

The image combination effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. This image combination effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image combination effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a It is a production that displays an image on the screen.

[Image combination production A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the image combination effect A, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. .. This variation display becomes visible via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. The image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smile face), and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect image EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73 (E) and 73 (F), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). As shown in FIG. 73 (G), when the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73 (H) to 73 (J), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state for each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). In addition, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination production B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. As shown in FIG. 74 (A), in the image combination effect B, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. .. Further, the effect image EF is displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display and the effect image EF can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four permeable members to the advance position, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

The effect image EF is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the effect image. The image combination effect is executed by the EF. Specifically, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Therefore, the effect image EF can be said to be an image related to the smile face character image. In this way, the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smile face), and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect image EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 (D) and 74 (E), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The effect image EF and the variable display are continuously displayed, and can be visually recognized without going through the first movable accessory 14. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the effect image EF disappears.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 (G) and 74 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display screen 7a displays a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed on the back area of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and has the shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the region on the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the following image TJs includes a face image of a character, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. Due to such an effect, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). In addition, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Image combination production C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), in the image combination effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. .. This variation display becomes visible via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed with the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs. Further, the smile face character image formed by the four character partial image BNs is an image of the same size and content as the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a, and these two images overlap. From this, it can be said that the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a is an image related to the smile face character image. In this way, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14, and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the character image DS, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. The smile image DS is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be visually recognized without going through the first movable accessory 14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the smile image DS disappears, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 75 (G), the stop-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative symbol explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 75 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. In the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). When the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. The production is done. In the second aspect in which the first movable accessory 14 has been moved to the advanced position, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14. It will be in a state of The display screen 7a continuously displays the variable display of the decorative pattern, the first movable accessory 14 continuously displays the character image MJ, and the light guide plate 17 continuously displays the smile image SL at a random position. Is displayed. The compound effect is executed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of these, the character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL, sometimes overlap and become visible. After that, the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. As a result, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without going through the first movable accessory 14 (second aspect). After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In the above, it is assumed that the display is performed over a plurality of fluctuation displays, but it may be performed with one fluctuation. That is, it may be performed at the time of pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 75 (E) and FIG. 75 (J) may be a temporary stop display.

[Image combination production D]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the image combination effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. As shown in FIG. 76 (A), in the image combination effect D, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. .. This variation display becomes visible via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. The image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smile face), and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect image EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the light guide plate display change effect is executed. Specifically, the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 A superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the above is sometimes overlapped and becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character image MJ to the character partial image BN. That is, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. As a result, the smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial image BNs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" can be visually recognized on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the character image MJ of each of the four transparent members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17 A superimposition effect is performed in which the smile image SL of the above is sometimes overlapped and becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75 (H) and 75 (I), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character image MJs of "su", "ma", "i", and "ru" are randomly visible in each of the four transparent members. Further, since the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 is randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are sometimes overlapped to be visible. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect). In addition, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image combination effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the first movable accessory 14 having four transparent and movable image display areas (movable light guide plates) has four image display areas. , It is possible to transition to a first state that is relatively close to each other and a second state that is relatively far from each other, and the character partial image BN can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, respectively. Yes, in the first state, by making the character partial image BN visible, the first effect of forming one smile face character image in the whole of the four character partial image BNs is executed. Can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a capable of switching between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, and the image display area of the first movable accessory 14. The image displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the (movable light guide plate), and in the first effect, the effect image EF associated with the smile face character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 are displayed on the display screen 7a in the second state, respectively. They are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, and when transitioning from the second state to the first state, they move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, after the first effect, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 transition to the second state. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 each have a character image MJ different from the character partial image BN. It is possible to switch between a visible state and a hard-to-see state, and while transitioning from the first state to the second state, the character image MJ repeats the visible state and the hard-to-see state, respectively. You can perform the production. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 73, the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes a light guide plate 17 capable of switching between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which the image is difficult to see. Therefore, the smile face character image formed by the four character partial image BN becomes visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image combination effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 73, it is assumed that the smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial image BNs represented by the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14. However, the target of the whole image represented by the whole of the partial images displayed on the four members (movable light guide plate) is not limited to the character image. For example, the entire image may be a specific character, figure, symbol, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the respective image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the image combination effect A of FIG. 73, a variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 75 and an explosion effect after the smile image SL display may be combined. Further, the follow-up image TJ as shown in FIG. 74 may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the image combination effect of FIGS. 73 to 76, the smile image SL and the character image MJ are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of transparent and movable first image display areas.
The plurality of first image display areas are
It is possible to transition to a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other.
It is possible to switch a predetermined image between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, respectively.
In the first state, by making the predetermined image visible, it is possible to execute the first effect of forming an image representing one specific target as a whole of the plurality of the predetermined images. A game machine that features the above.
◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1 is further described.
It has a second image display area that allows the image to be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.
The image represented in the second image display area can be visually recognized through the one image display area.
In the first effect, a gaming machine characterized in that an image associated with an image representing the specific target is displayed in the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-2.
The plurality of first image display areas are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the second image display area in the second state, from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine characterized in that each transition is made toward the vicinity of the center of the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the first effect, the plurality of first image display areas transition to the second state.
◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4.
The plurality of first image display areas are
An image different from the predetermined image can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state, respectively.
While transitioning from the first state to the second state, it is possible to execute a second effect of repeating a state in which an image different from the specific image is visible and a state in which it is difficult to see, respectively. A game machine to play.
◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5 is further described.
It is equipped with a third image display area that allows the image to be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that an image representing the specific object becomes visible through the third image display area.

The interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. This interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is an effect to display an image.

[Interlocking production A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. Further, each of the four transparent members is configured to be movable in front of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the interlocking effect A, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. This variation display becomes visible via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. As shown in FIG. 77 (C), when each of the four transparent members moves to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

At this time, the related image display effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. An image associated with the face character image may be displayed. For example, the effect image EF may be displayed according to the contour of the smile face character image. If the effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, the effect is as if light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smile face), and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect image EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can further entertain the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) and 77 (E), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN is visible on each of the four transparent members. After that, each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14 (first aspect).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (F), 77 (G), and 74 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a (transition from the first aspect to the second aspect). At this time, the display screen 7a displays a follow-up image TJ that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed on the back area of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and has the shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the region on the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the follow-up image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. In other words, the four follow-up images TJ have a shape along the outer shape of each of the four transparent members. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. In this interlocking effect, when the four (transparent members) transmission regions transition from the first aspect to the second aspect, the four tracking image TJs move in conjunction with the movement of each of the four transmission regions. Each of the moving follow-up images TJ becomes visible through each of the four moving transmission regions. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four follow-up images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the following image TJs includes a face image of a character, and the effect button 63 executes a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the follow-up image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. Due to such an effect, from the player's point of view, the follow-up image TJ appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area of the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. Due to this superposition effect, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display starts.

[Interlocking production B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the interlocking effect B, the face image KG that follows (interlocks) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. At least a part of the face image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a in the area on the back surface of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the face image KG can be visually recognized through a member having four transmissive parts. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The face image KG and the variable display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. At this time, the four face image KGs on the display screen 7a each follow (interlock with) the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14. Thereby, the four face image KGs are continuously visible through the four transmissive members while the four transmissive members are moving, and the other part is four transmissive members. It becomes visible without going through a member having.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. As shown in FIG. 77 (C), when each of the four transparent members moves to the advanced position, a movable accessory uniting effect is performed in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). ). At this time, each of the four transparent members may be in contact with each other, or may have a slight gap. By this movable accessory combination effect, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented by the four members of the first movable accessory 14 and the smile face character image on the display screen 7a on the rear side of the smile face character image. The image associated with the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed according to the outline of the smile face character image. The effect image EF is an annular light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and is an effect as if light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this way, the entire plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable accessory 14 constitutes a character image representing one object (here, a smile face), and further, the character image is used on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect image EF, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a large number of elements are intricately intertwined. This can further entertain the player. The four face image KGs are continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) and 78 (E), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the four face image KGs on the display screen 7a each follow (interlock with) the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable accessory 14. Thereby, the four face image KGs are continuously visible through the four transmissive members while the four transmissive members are moving, and the other part is four transmissive members. It becomes visible without going through a member having.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), each of the four transparent members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable accessory 14. (First aspect).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (F), 78 (G), and 78 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed on the back area of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and has the outer shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG has the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four frame image WGs are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is executed inside the frame image WG so that the character image MJ represented by the four transparent members can be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. Due to such an effect, from the player's point of view, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area of the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Then, a plurality of smile image SLs are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 78 (J), the stop-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display starts.

[Interlocking production C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (A), 79 (B), and 79 (C), in the interlocking effect C, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. On the display screen 7a, four timer image TMs that follow (interlock with) the movement of the four transparent members are displayed. The timer image TM is an image displayed on the back area of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and is a two-digit image representing the timer value (count value). Numerical image (digital display image) of. The timer image TM has a frame image having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the four transparent members. The frame image has a shape that follows the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image also has the same rectangular shape. From the player's point of view, the timer image TM appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four timer image TMs are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the countdown of the four timer image TMs is started immediately after being displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after being displayed. Further, here, different timer values "10", "14", "15", and "12" are set in the four timer image TMs, and the respective timer values are decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as seconds.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) and 79 (E), when the timer value of one of the timer image TMs (here, the upper left) becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and the timer image TM and , The retracting movement effect of the transparent member corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, from the state where one of the four transparent members (here, the upper left) constituting the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a, the evacuation positions of the four corners of the display screen 7a Move towards. The other three transparent members do not move. The upper left timer image TM whose timer value is 0 (zero) moves following (interlocking) with the movement of the upper left transparent member. As a result, from the player's point of view, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to be moving as it is. Then, a part of the variable display becomes visible on the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (F) and 79 (G), when the timer value of the next one (here, the lower right) of the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image The retracting movement effect of the TM and the transparent member of the first movable accessory 14 corresponding to the timer image TM is executed. Specifically, among the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining three members covering the display screen 7a is displayed from the state of covering the display screen 7a. Move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining two transparent members do not move. The timer image TM in the lower right where the timer value becomes 0 (zero) moves following (interlocking) with the movement of the transparent member in the lower right. As a result, from the player's point of view, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to be moving as it is. Then, a part of the variable display becomes visible on the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), when the timer value of the next one (here, the upper right) of the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and the first movable are A retracting movement effect of a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, among the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining two members covering the display screen 7a is displayed from the state of covering the display screen 7a. Move toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining one transparent member does not move. The timer image TM on the upper right when the timer value becomes 0 (zero) moves following (interlocking) with the movement of the transparent member on the upper right. As a result, from the player's point of view, the timer image TM is displayed on the transparent member and appears to be moving as it is. Then, a part of the variable display becomes visible on the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (I) and 79 (J), when the timer value of the last one (here, the lower left) of the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM , And, of the first movable accessory 14, the retracting movement effect of the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM is executed. Then, after the entire variable display becomes visible, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (J).

[Interlocking production D]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the interlocking effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state.

In the interlocking effect D, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), 80 (B), and 80 (C), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG that follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed on the back area of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and has the outer shape of the four transparent members. It has almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transparent members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transparent members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG has the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four frame image WGs are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17. It has become.

During the movement of the four transparent members, the character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 portion) of the smile face character image is visible in each member. Here, a combination effect is executed inside the frame image WG so that the character partial image BN can be visually recognized. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advance position, the four character partial image BNs are close to each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, by gathering the four members of the first movable accessory 14 at the advance position, it is possible to form an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target as a whole of the four character partial image BNs.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (D) and 80 (E), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the four frame image WGs on the display screen 7a move toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. Due to such an effect, from the player's point of view, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members.

As shown in FIG. 80 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that can be seen without passing through the first movable accessory 14. Will be done. Then, a plurality of smile image SLs are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 80 (E), the stop-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative symbol explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (F).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (F), 80 (G), and 80 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG that continuously follows (interlocks with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since the configuration is the same as described above, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members when viewed from the player. By moving each of the four transparent members to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second aspect). Further, the four frame image WGs are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is executed inside the frame image WG so that the character image MJ represented by the four transparent members can be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transparent members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transparent members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. The part shrinks. Due to such an effect, from the player's point of view, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on the four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a visible area of the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Then, a plurality of smile image SLs are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions different from each other on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which a plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly visible. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is performed so that the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random by overlapping with the stop-displayed decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 80 (J), the stop-displayed decorative symbol explodes and disappears due to this superposition effect. That is, by randomly appearing the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 on the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to produce an effect as if the decorative symbol was destroyed by the smile image SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display starts.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the interlocking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIG. 77, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a transparent and movable first movable accessory 14 and a display screen 7a capable of displaying an image, and the first movable accessory 1 is provided. The 14 is movable in front of the display screen 7a, and the first movable accessory 14 and the following image TJ displayed on the display screen 7a move in conjunction with each other, so that the moving first movable accessory 14 is moved. It is possible to execute an interlocking effect in which the following image TJ being moved can be visually recognized via 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, each of the first movable accessory 14 includes four transparent and movable transmission regions (movable light guide plates), and four of them are included. The transmission regions can be transitioned to a first mode in which they are relatively close to each other and a second mode in which they are relatively separated from each other. When, the four follow-up image TJs move in conjunction with the movement of each of the four transmission regions, and each of the moving follow-up image TJs is visible through each of the four moving transmission regions. Become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmission regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14 correspond to the four corners of the display screen 7a in the second aspect, respectively. It is arranged at a position, and when transitioning from the second aspect to the first aspect, it moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the follow-up image TJ has a shape along the outer shape of each of the four transmission regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable accessory 14. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, each of the four transmission regions (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14 can display the character partial image BN, and the transmission region is displayed. It is possible to execute a combination effect of the character partial image BN and the effect image EF displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 77, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a first movable accessory 14 and a light guide plate 17 arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is provided. , The smile image SL can be displayed, and the combination effect of the smile image SL displayed by the light guide plate 17 and the decorative pattern displayed by the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the interlocking effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The follow-up image TJ of FIG. 77 is not limited to the above configuration. The follow-up image TJ may be, for example, an image having a shape substantially along the outer shape of the four members (movable light guide plate) of the first movable accessory 14, or a part of the outer shape of the four members (movable light guide plate). It may be an image having a shape along the line. The substantially conforming shape means a shape that the player can recognize that the outer shapes of the four members (movable light guide plate) correspond to the shapes of the follow-up image TJ image.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the interlocking effects of FIGS. 77 to 80 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the interlocking effect A of FIG. 77, the timer image TM as shown in FIG. 79, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the evacuation movement effect may be combined.
[Modification 3]
In each of the interlocking effects of FIGS. 77 to 80, the smile image SL and the character image MJ displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable accessory 14 may be displayed randomly or have a certain regularity. May be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A movable accessory that is transparent and movable,
A gaming machine provided with an image display area capable of displaying an image.
The movable accessory is movable in front of the image display area, and is movable.
By moving the movable accessory and the specific image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other, the interlocking effect that the specific image in motion can be visually recognized via the movable accessory in motion is produced. A gaming machine characterized by being feasible.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
Each of the movable accessories includes a plurality of transparent regions that are both transparent and movable.
The plurality of transmission regions can transition to a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other.
In the interlocking effect, when the plurality of transparent regions transition from the first state to the second state, the plurality of specific images move and move in conjunction with the movement of the plurality of transparent regions. A gaming machine characterized in that each of the specific images moving is visible through each of the plurality of transparent regions inside.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-2.
The plurality of transparent regions are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the image display region in the second state, and when the transition from the second state to the first state occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that each moves toward the vicinity of the center of the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
A game machine according to the aspect A7-2 or the aspect A7-3.
The specific image is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific image has a shape along the outer shape of each of the plurality of transmission regions.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4.
Each of the plurality of transparent regions can display an image, and the image can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a combination effect of an image displayed by the transparent area and an image displayed by the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5 is further described.
It is transparent and has a front area that is located in front of the movable accessory and the image display area.
The front area can display an image and
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a combination effect of an image displayed by the front area and an image displayed by the image display area.

The hold icon image matching effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. This hold icon image matching effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon image matching effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This hold icon image matching effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). It should be noted that the hold icon image matching effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations (plural variation effects) of the special symbol.

[Hold icon image matching effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect A.
In the hold icon image matching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81B, the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB1 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the rhombus image XB11 is arranged in the rectangular image XB12. The diamond-shaped image XB11 has a brick-like pattern, and the letter "S" is shown in the center.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to suck the specific image XB1. Therefore, the specific image XB1 disappears from the display screen 7a once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the diamond-shaped image XB11 of the specific image XB1 sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is moved. Hold change to the same shape as the rhombus image XB11 (one of the look-ahead effects). The size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the diamond image XB11 is smaller than that of the diamond image XB11.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect A, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as a part of the specific image XB1 (diamond image XB11) reduced.

[Hold icon image matching effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect B.
In the hold icon image matching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is rhombic, has a brick-like pattern, and has the letter "S" in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to suck the specific image XB2. Therefore, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific image XB2 sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, so that one of the hold icons 9A has the same shape as the specific image XB2. Hold change (one of the look-ahead effects). The size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than that of the specific image XB2.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect B, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2 itself.

[Hold icon image matching effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect C.
In the hold icon image matching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83B, the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is rhombic, has a brick-like pattern, and has the letter "S" in the middle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the third movable accessory effect is executed. In this third movable accessory effect, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable accessory 18. In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged so that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18. Here, the integrally formed product (mark, design product) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to suck the specific mark (or the specific image XB2). At this time, the specific image XB2 disappears from the display screen 7a once, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to the home position.
In addition, at the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, a specific mark (or a specific image XB2) sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is specified. Hold change to the same shape as image XB2 (one of the look-ahead effects). The size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than that of the specific image XB2.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect C, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2.

[Hold icon image matching effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon image matching effect D.
In the hold icon image matching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. The specific image XB2 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a brick-like pattern, and the letter "S" is shown in the center.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the third movable accessory effect is executed. In this third movable accessory effect, the third movable accessory 18 is moved so that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable accessory 18. In other words, the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged so that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable accessory 18. Here, the integrally formed product (mark, design product) formed by the third movable accessory 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is stored in the character CRA so as to suck the specific mark. At this time, the specific image XB2 disappears from the display screen 7a once, and the third movable accessory 18 returns to the home position.
In addition, at the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable accessory 18 may be returned to the home position, and the specific image XB2 may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the hold icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific mark sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, so that one of the hold icons 9A is held in the same shape as the specific mark. Change (one of the look-ahead effects). The size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific mark is smaller than that of the specific mark.
That is, in the hold icon image matching effect D, one of the hold icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific mark.

In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects A to D, other effects (such as other hold icon image matching effects) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon image matching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the hold icon image matching effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon in a part of the same mode as the specific image is displayed in the hold icon change effect. Will be done. According to this configuration, since a specific image and one of the hold icons have the same mode in part, the display of the specific image can increase the player's expectation for the hold change, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

[Effect 2]
In the hold icon image matching effects B and C, the specific image XB2 is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the hold icon having the same mode (shape) as the specific image XB2 is displayed in the hold icon change effect. According to this configuration, since the specific image XB2 and one of the hold icons have the same mode (shape), the display of the specific image XB2 can further increase the expectation of the player for the hold change. , The fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects A to D, the hold icon change effect is performed after the specific image display effect. According to this configuration, the hold icon change effect is performed after the specific image is displayed, so that when the specific image is displayed, the player can have a higher expectation for the hold change, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects A to D, a normal hold icon is displayed before the display of the specific image, and after the display of the specific image, the hold icon having at least a part of the mode from the normal hold icon to the specific image is displayed. A pending change effect that changes to is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the hold icon having at least a part of the aspect of the specific image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the hold icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is displayed, the third accessory movable effect of moving the third movable accessory 18 is executed. According to this configuration, the display of the specific image XB2 can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is displayed, the third accessory movable effect that moves the third movable accessory 18 is executed, and the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory 18 are moved. One mark (specific mark) is formed with 18. According to this configuration, since the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory 18 can form a specific mark, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold icon image matching effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon image matching effect of the game machine of the above embodiment, the specific image and the hold icon have a partly the same shape (or the same), but the specific image and the hold icon have a part of the same (or the same) mode. ), For example, the specific image and the hold icon may have the same or the same outline shape, or may have the same or the same pattern or color.

[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects C and D, the color of the hold icon changed in the hold icon change effect may be different from or the same as the color of the specific mark.

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects C and D, the hold icon may be hidden by moving the third movable accessory 18 so as to temporarily hide the hold icon, and then the hold icon may be changed. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 may cover the entire hold icon or a part of the hold icon.

[Modification example 4]
In the hold icon image matching effects C and D, the hold change in the hold icon change effect may be performed after the third movable accessory 18 returns from the deployed position to the home position.

[Modification 5]
In the above-mentioned hold icon image matching effects C and D, when the third movable accessory 18 moves to the end of the display screen 7a, an image that moves from the end toward the hold icon is displayed, and the image is displayed. The hold change may be made when the hold icon is reached. In this case, when the image reaches the hold icon, a suggestion image suggesting that it has arrived is displayed. This end may be at a position facing the position where the hold icon is displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image larger than the hold icon of the first aspect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are , Some are in the same mode,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
The hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect have the same aspect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1 or the aspect XB-2.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the second aspect, which is different from the shape of the hold icon of the first aspect.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second display effect, and in the first display effect, the hold icon of the second aspect displayed in the third display effect. Instead, the hold icon of the first aspect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of moving a movable accessory in front of the display means.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XB-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-5.
In the combination effect, one mark is formed by the predetermined image of the second display effect and the movable accessory of the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The impact effect of the movable accessory will be described below with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. This movable accessory impact effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory impact effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This movable accessory impact effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). In addition, the movable accessory impact effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations (plural variation effects) of the special symbol.

[Movable accessory impact production A]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect A.
In the movable accessory impact effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the accessory movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the peripheral edge portion of the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper edge portion of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is a position that does not cover the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the peripheral edge of the second movable accessory 15 and the upper edge of the display screen 7a appear to be adjacent to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the hold change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is held and changed while the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 85C, the hold icon 9A that has changed hold is shown by cross-hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable accessory impact production B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect B.
In the movable accessory impact effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the accessory movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, from the player's point of view, a part of the second movable accessory 15 seems to cover a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the hold change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is held and changed while the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 86 (C), the hold icon 9A that has changed hold is shown by cross-hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable accessory impact production C]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect C.
In the movable accessory impact effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the accessory movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, from the player's point of view, a part of the second movable accessory 15 seems to cover a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the screen shaking effect is executed. In this screen shaking effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the display screen 7a, and the impact causes the display screen 7a to shake. Specifically, the screen shaking effect is on the display screen 7a. A state in which the character CRA (character display area) and the hold icons 9A and 9C (hold area) are shaken (vibrated) is shown. Further, in this screen shaking effect, a predetermined sound effect (pee or the like) is notified from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the hold change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, one of the hold icons 9A is held and changed due to the screen shaking effect. In FIG. 87 (D), the hold icon 9A that has been changed to hold is shown by cross-hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.
It should be noted that the screen shaking effect and the hold change effect may be performed at the same time.

[Movable accessory impact production D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory impact effect D.
In the movable accessory impact effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the accessory movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 is at a position where a part of the second movable accessory 15 covers the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. That is, from the player's point of view, a part of the second movable accessory 15 seems to cover a part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the Inazuma effect is executed. In this Inazuma effect, the Inazuma image XC1 is displayed by moving the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. The Inazuma image XC1 is an image showing a state in which the Inazuma extends from the second movable accessory 15 toward the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the Inazuma arrival suggestion effect is executed. In this Inazuma arrival suggestion effect, the Inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed by performing the Inazuma effect. The Inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed around the hold icon 9A that the Inazuma image XC1 has reached from the second movable accessory 15 in the Inazuma effect, and indicates that Inazuma has arrived at the hold icon 9A. This is a suggestive image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the hold change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the hold icon 9A on which the arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed changes on hold. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, other effects (such as other movable accessory impact effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the hold icons 9a, 9b, and 9c are displayed in the hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end portion facing the upper end portion on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the impact effect of the movable accessory is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable is possible when the hold icon of the first aspect (the same aspect as in the decorative symbol variation effect; the normal aspect) is displayed. A movable accessory effect is performed in which the accessory 15 is movable, and by performing the movable accessory effect, one of the hold icons is changed to hold and becomes the hold icon of the second aspect. According to this configuration, since the accessory movable effect is performed when the hold is changed, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit just by moving the movable accessory (second movable accessory 15). Can improve the interest of.

[Effect 2]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, so that the movable accessory (second movable accessory 15) Can give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit just by moving to the end of the display screen 7a, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the movable accessory impact effects B to D, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the hold change effect is performed by moving the second movable accessory 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, so that the movable accessory (second movable accessory) Just by moving the 15) to the front of the end of the display screen 7a, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D, the hold icon is displayed in the hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end portion corresponding to the upper end portion on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper end portion of the display screen 7a, the hold icon located at the lower end portion facing the upper end portion changes on hold, so that a sense of dynamism is obtained as a whole. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the movable accessory impact effect C, the screen shake effect is performed and the hold change effect is performed by performing the accessory movable effect. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 is movable, the screen shake effect is performed by the impact, and the hold change effect is performed. Therefore, the hold change effect can be emphasized by the screen shake effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the movable accessory impact effect C, a predetermined sound effect (pee or the like) is notified from the speaker 67 in the screen shaking effect. According to this configuration, when the screen shaking effect is performed and the hold change effect is performed, the hold change effect can be made to stand out with a predetermined sound effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the impact effect of the movable accessory.
[Modification 1]
In the movable accessory impact effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 comes to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon is changed to hold, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the hold icon may be changed to hold simply when the second movable accessory 15 moves. Further, when the second movable accessory 15 comes to the lower end portion, the left end portion, the right end portion, the center portion, or the like instead of the upper end portion of the display screen 7a, the hold icon may be held and changed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the hold icon of the first aspect.
The second display effect is an effect of moving a movable accessory to move the accessory.
The third display effect is an effect of changing the hold icon of the first aspect to the hold icon of the second aspect.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed and the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed and the second display effect is performed. , The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-1.
The home position of the movable accessory is a position different from the front of the display means.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the accessory movable effect of moving the movable accessory from the home position to the first end of the display means is performed, so that the third display effect is performed. Is done,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is performed by moving the movable accessory from the home position to the front of the first end portion of the display means. Display production is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-4]
A game machine according to the aspect XC-2 or the aspect XC-3.
The hold icon is displayed in the display means in a hold area arranged adjacent to a second end facing the first end.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-4.
In the combination effect, by performing the second display effect, the predetermined display area including the hold area in the display means is shaken, and the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-5.
In the combination effect, when the shaking effect is performed by the display means, a predetermined sound effect is notified.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. This hold display effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), and more specifically, the hold display of the first special symbol. It is an effect that the hold display of the second special symbol is integrally displayed and displayed in a plurality of places.

[Hold display production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A.
In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 89A shows that the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, the hold number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reserved numbers are displayed close to the left and right in the area. For example, the hold number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are conspicuously displayed in white. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers are displayed in close proximity to each other. Like H1, K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the hold display effect A, the number of holds related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is integrally displayed at two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of holds related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, and K1 and K2 indicating the number of these reservations are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 89 (A), H1 and K1 indicate "3", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "3", and the number of reserved second special symbols is "3". It suggests that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is in the normal state. Further, in the hold display effect A, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digestion image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the loss confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (A) has been lost. In this example, "758" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "3", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is shown in FIG. 89 (A). ) Is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (C) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. Further, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are the decorations shown in FIG. 89 (C). It is the same as the design variation effect. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit.

Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize has been awarded to the second starting port 21, so the decorative symbol time-saving effect here (the first decorative pattern variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, assuming that there were three prizes for the second starting port 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And. When the time saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to hit right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player wins a game ball at the second starting port 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win by hitting right when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR. Can be made to. In addition, during this period, winning a prize in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time saving effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (E) has been lost. In this example, "857" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation time saving effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is "1", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is "3". It is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction effect shown in E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time reduction effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display production B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect B.
In the hold display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 90 (A) shows that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, the hold number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reserved numbers are displayed close to the left and right in the area. For example, the hold number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are conspicuously displayed in white. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers are displayed in close proximity to each other. Like H1, K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. That is, in the hold display effect B, the number of holds related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is integrally displayed at two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of holds related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 is integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, and K1 and K2 indicating the number of these reservations are displayed continuously on the display screen 7a and are never erased. In FIG. 90 (A), H1 and K1 indicate "2", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "2", and the number of reserved second special symbols is "2". It suggests that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is in the normal state. Further, in the hold display effect B, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digestion image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 90 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the accessory first movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the first movable effect of the accessory, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 90 (B), the accessory YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 90 (C), and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. It is designed to stop for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to cover it. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the reserved number display area HR is covered with the accessory YA, and therefore, the H1 indicating the reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related. H2, which indicates the number of holds, is invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are not covered by the accessory YA. It is visible, so that the player can see K1 and K2 (K1 is "2", K2 is "0"), and is related to the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can grasp the number of holds. The accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged so as to be movable up and down on the upper back side of the above-mentioned board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1), and is located inside the game machine frame 50 in the home position. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the second movable effect of the accessory is executed on the display screen 7a. In this second movable effect of the accessory, the accessory YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 90 (C) for a predetermined time, and then further descends to the second position shown in FIG. 90 (D) to display the display screen. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time on the front side so as to cover the lower part of the 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are covered with the accessory YA. , K1 and K2 are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the hold number display area HR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, the player can see H1 and H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2" and "0" for H2), it is possible to grasp the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
In this way, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a is The number of holds related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 displayed at any of the positions can be visually recognized. In other words, the number of holds related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a is all even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable. Is not invisible, and the number of holds related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 displayed at at least one place is visible. Therefore, the player can always grasp the information on the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, and can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. Further, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (D). It is the same as that shown in. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit.

Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize has been awarded to the second starting port 21, so the decorative symbol time-saving effect here (the first decorative pattern variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, assuming that there were three prizes for the second starting port 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And. When the time saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to hit right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player wins a game ball at the second starting port 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win by hitting right when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR. Can be made to. In addition, during this period, winning a prize in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time saving effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 90 (F) has been lost. In this example, "857" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation time saving effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is "1", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is "3", which is shown in FIG. 90 ( It is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction effect shown in F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time reduction effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C.
In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 91 (A) shows that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed in close proximity to the left and right at the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to be conspicuous. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. The upper part in the game information display area YR, directly above H1 and H2, is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, thereby suggesting the variable result (lottery result) of the special symbol. 4 F1 and F2 as symbols are displayed in close proximity to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed as "○" figures. For example, F1 is displayed in red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is displayed in blue (indicated by polka dots), which are different color schemes from each other. F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbol is stopped (displaying the symbol) by turning it on or off and stopping. For example, stopping with both F1 and F2 lit suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and both F1 and F2 are not lit (either F1 or F2 is off, And, by stopping at the state where both F1 and F2 are turned off), it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed in close proximity to each other in a column. Like H1, K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and when the number from 0 to 9 fluctuates, it indicates that the special symbol is changing, and when it stops at any number from 0 to 9, the special symbol changes. Indicates that the system is stopped (displaying a symbol). For example, stopping the DY at a number 7 suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and stopping the DY at a number other than 7 suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. ..
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. .. In other words, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of these reservations and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are always continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. is there.
In FIG. 91 (A), H1 and K1 indicate "3", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "3", and the number of reserved second special symbols is "3". It suggests that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is in the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digestion image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the loss confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (A) has been lost. In this example, "758" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation effect, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "3", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is shown in FIG. 89 (A). ) Is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect. In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (the off state of F1 is indicated by "●", the off state of F2 is indicated by "○"), and DY is stopped at 6 (a number other than 7). Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol variation effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0". Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (C) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. Further, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are the decorations shown in FIG. 91 (C). It is the same as the design variation effect. In addition, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are lit (the lighting state of F1 is red (indicated by hatching), the lighting state of F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots), and DY is stopped at 7, which is a special symbol. It is suggested that the lottery result is a big hit. In addition, the characters "Big hit ~!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. By this big hit confirmation effect , The player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and is high until the next jackpot after the jackpot game ends. It is a big hit that will be in a short time state (high accuracy and high base state).

Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize has been awarded to the second starting port 21, so the decorative symbol time-saving effect here (the first decorative pattern variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, assuming that there were three prizes for the second starting port 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state. When the time saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to hit right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player wins a game ball at the second starting port 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win by hitting right when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR. Can be made to. In addition, during this period, winning a prize in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time saving effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (E) has been lost. In this example, "857" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation time saving effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is "1", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is "3", which is shown in FIG. 91 ( It is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction effect shown in E). In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (F1 is turned off by "●", F2 is turned off by "○"), and DY is stopped at 9 (a number other than 7). Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time reduction effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state.

[Hold display production D]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D.
In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 92 (A) shows that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed in close proximity to the left and right at the lower part of the area. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to be conspicuous. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. The upper part in the game information display area YR, directly above H1 and H2, is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, thereby suggesting the variable result (lottery result) of the special symbol. 4 F1 and F2 as symbols are displayed in close proximity to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed as "○" figures. For example, F1 is displayed in red (indicated by hatching) and F2 is displayed in blue (indicated by polka dots), which are different color schemes from each other. F1 and F2 indicate that the special symbol is changing by blinking, and indicate that the special symbol is stopped (displaying the symbol) by turning it on or off and stopping. For example, stopping with both F1 and F2 lit suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and both F1 and F2 are not lit (either F1 or F2 is off, And, by stopping at the state where both F1 and F2 are turned off), it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers and DY as the fourth symbol are displayed in close proximity to each other in a column. Like H1, K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and when the number from 0 to 9 fluctuates, it indicates that the special symbol is changing, and when it stops at any number from 0 to 9, the special symbol changes. Indicates that the system is stopped (displaying a symbol). For example, stopping the DY at a number 7 suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and stopping the DY at a number other than 7 suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. ..
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at two places, the upper left side and the lower right side of the display screen 7a. .. In other words, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2 and K1, K2 indicating the number of these reservations and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol are always continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and are never erased. is there.
In FIG. 92 (A), H1 and K1 indicate "2", H2 and K2 indicate "0", the number of reserved first special symbols is "2", and the number of reserved second special symbols is "2". It suggests that it is "0". This is because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is in the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (hold digestion image) 9C (FIG. 1) may also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92B, the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 92 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this reach effect, the reserved numbers H1, K1 related to the first special symbol, the reserved numbers H2, K2 related to the second special symbol, and F1, F2, DY as the fourth symbol are shown in FIG. 92 (A). It is the same as the decorative pattern variation effect shown in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the accessory first movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the first movable effect of the accessory, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B), the accessory YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 92 (C), and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. It is designed to stop for a predetermined time on the front side of the display screen 7a so as to cover it. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the game information display area YR is covered with the accessory YA, and therefore, it is related to H1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. H2, which indicates the number of reservations, and F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are , It is visible without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is "2" and K2 is "0"). By visually recognizing the DY as the fourth symbol (DY is "↓"), it is possible to grasp that the special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is being displayed in a variable manner. The accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is arranged so as to be movable up and down on the upper back side of the above-mentioned board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1), and is located inside the game machine frame 50 in the home position. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the accessory second movable effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this second movable effect of the accessory, the accessory YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 92 (C) for a predetermined time, and then further descends to the second position shown in FIG. 92 (D) to display the display screen. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time on the front side so as to cover the lower part of the 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are combined. Covered by object YA, therefore K1, K2 and DY are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the game information display area YR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, the player can see H1 and H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2" and "0" for H2), the number of holds related to the first special symbol and the number of holds related to the second special symbol can be grasped, and F1 and F2 (F1) as the fourth symbol can be grasped. By visually recognizing (F2 is in a blinking state), it is possible to grasp that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
In this way, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 and which are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a and In the fourth symbol, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 and the fourth symbol displayed at any position can be visually recognized. In other words, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a, are when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable. Even if there is, not all of them become invisible, and the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 displayed at at least one place can be seen. There is. Therefore, the player can always grasp the information on the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21, and can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. Further, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the reserved numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (D). It is the same as that shown in. On the other hand, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol both stop in the lit state (F1 is red (indicated by hatching), F2 is blue (indicated by polka dots)), and DY as the fourth symbol is 7. It has stopped, suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit.

Next, the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game is started. When the time saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the decorative symbol time saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the jackpot game is over, no prize has been awarded to the second starting port 21, so the decorative symbol time-saving effect here (the first decorative pattern variation effect after the time-saving game is started) is the first special. It is executed based on the number of reservations related to the symbol. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, assuming that there were three prizes for the second starting port 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state. When the time saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to hit right is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time-saving game. The player wins a game ball at the second starting port 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win by hitting right when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR. Can be made to. In addition, during this period, winning a prize in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the loss confirmation time saving effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time saving effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 92 (F) has been lost. In this example, "857" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation time saving effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol is "1", and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol is "3", which is shown in FIG. 92 ( It is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction effect shown in F). In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (F1 is turned off by "●", F2 is turned off by "○"), and DY is stopped at 9 (a number other than 7). Suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), the decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time reduction effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 related to the second special symbol , K2 decreases from "3" to "2". The reserved numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the hold related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the hold related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbols are in a blinking state, and DY is in a fluctuating state (shown by ↓), suggesting that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a fluctuating state.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port is set separately from the hold icons related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , It is configured to be integrated and continuously displayed on the display screen with numbers. According to this configuration, the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port is always continuously displayed on the display screen as compared with the hold icon that may be erased by a predetermined effect or the like. The player can check the current number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port at any time. Moreover, since the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port is displayed as a single number, the player can display the hold display related to the first start port and the hold display related to the second start port. You can check the number of holdings at a glance and grasp the contents without the trouble of searching. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, by displaying the fluctuation in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol separately from the decorative symbol, a lottery for whether or not the variation display is a big hit is drawn. The fourth symbol suggesting the result is always and continuously displayed on the display screen together with the number of holdings related to the first starting port and the second starting port. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol is always continuously displayed on the display screen as compared with the decorative symbol that may be erased by a predetermined effect or the like, so that the player can always display the current special symbol. It is possible to confirm the display state, that is, whether the special symbol is changing or stopped, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. Moreover, since the fourth symbol is displayed integrally with the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port, the player is concerned with the hold display related to the first start port and the second start port. It is possible to check the number of holds and the fourth symbol at a glance and grasp their contents without the trouble of searching for the hold display and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first start port, and the number of holds related to the second start port are integrally displayed on the display screen. In addition to displaying, it is configured to be displayed at multiple locations on the display screen. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port, which are integrally displayed, are further displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen. Therefore, the player can find the hold display related to the first start port, the hold display related to the second start port, and the display of the fourth symbol very easily. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the fourth symbol that is integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen, the number of reservations related to the first starting port, and the second starting port. The number of holds is the number of holds related to the fourth symbol, the first start port, and the number of holds related to the second start port, which are displayed at any part of the display screen even when the movable body is moved. Is configured to be visible. In other words, the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port and the second start port, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen, are all invisible even when the movable body is movable. It is never possible, and the number of holds and the fourth symbol related to the first start port and the second start port displayed at at least one place are visually recognizable. According to this configuration, the player can always grasp the number of holds and the display of the fourth symbol related to the first start port and the second start port, and can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the number of holds related to the fourth symbol, the first start port, and the number of holds related to the second start port are diagonally arranged on the display screen. It is configured to be displayed. According to this configuration, the movable range of the movable body is designed so that the display of the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port can be always visually recognized. Becomes easier. That is, the restriction on the movable range of the movable body is relaxed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first start port, and the number of holds related to the second start port are located at the same position on the display screen. It is configured to be displayed without moving. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first start port, and the number of holds related to the second start port are always displayed at the same place on the display screen, so that the player can be extremely You can easily find these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are at the upper left and lower right of the display screen. Although they are displayed diagonally, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are the upper right and lower left, upper middle and lower middle, middle left and middle right, upper left and upper right, and lower left of the display screen. It may be displayed in the lower right corner. That is, when the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol to be integrally displayed are displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen, at least the left end and the right end of the display screen, Alternatively, the display may include the upper end and the lower end.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed at the lower right of the display screen are Similar to the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen, the display may be performed within a predetermined display area. Further, the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol, the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol, and the arrangement of the fourth symbol are arbitrary, and any display mode can be used as long as they are collectively displayed. May be good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the number of holds display area for displaying the fourth symbol are displayed in the area. The game information display area is arranged in a predetermined color and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the hold number display area and the game information display area may change depending on the game state. For example, the color suggests the current game state, such as white when the game state is normal, blue when the low probability time saving state, green when the high probability time saving state, and red when the game state is latent state. You may do so.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is displayed by a plurality of figures (“○”) having different colors, and these figures are displayed. By blinking or stopping, it is suggested that the special symbol is changing or stopped (displaying the symbol, displaying the lottery result), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is added with symbols (numbers and characters), and the symbols are displayed together with the figures in a predetermined mode so as to indicate that the special symbol is changing or stopped. May be good. For example, when the fourth symbol is displayed as a figure and a number, this number is synchronized with another fourth symbol (DY) displayed as a number at the lower right of the display screen, and the same display mode is used. It may be displayed with. In this way, the player can easily understand the relationship between the fourth symbol and the special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, a plurality of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol, a plurality of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed on the same display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display screens are provided in the game area, and the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed one by one (one set) on those display screens. You may try to do it. Alternatively, a 7-segment display is provided in the game area separately from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), and the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed. It may be displayed on the screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and the 7-segment display. Alternatively, apart from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), an LED or a lamp display is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth The design may be displayed on the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and the LED or lamp display.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
The first start port and the second start port,
A display means that can display multiple displays on a predetermined display screen,
It is a game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display of the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port.
The display means integrally displays the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
A special symbol display means for displaying the lottery result of winning or not by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner based on the winning of the first starting port or the second starting port is provided.
One of the plurality of displays is a second display.
The second display is a display of a fourth symbol that suggests the lottery result by performing a variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.
The display means integrally displays the fourth symbol together with the number of reservations related to the first start port and the second start port.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display means displays the first display and the second display at a plurality of places on the display screen.
At least one of the plurality of locations, the first display and the second display are displayed in a predetermined display area.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-2.
[Aspect C3-4]
The display screen is formed in a substantially rectangular shape.
The plurality of places of the display screen on which the first display and the second display are displayed include at least the left end and the right end, or the upper end and the lower end of the display screen.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-3.
[Aspect C3-5]
Movable movable body and
A control means for movably controlling the movable body in a predetermined mode,
With
The first display and the second display displayed at the plurality of places are the first display displayed at any of the places even when the movable body is moved by the control means. And the second display is visible,
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-3 or the aspect C3-4.

The zone effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. This zone effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the zone effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This zone effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). It should be noted that the zone effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (plural variation effect).

[Zone production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect A.
In the zone effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that it is the first zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "first zone" suggesting the first zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally to the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the upper 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from right to left, and in the lower 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from left to right. To do. Not limited to this, the characters "first zone" may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the second zone has been entered. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that it is the second zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "second zone" suggesting the second zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left portion and the right portion of the display screen 7a, respectively. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as not to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 on the left side, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 on the right side, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. Move to. Not limited to this, the characters "second zone" may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also the first state.

[Zone production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect B.
In the zone effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that it is the first zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "first zone" suggesting the first zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally to the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the upper 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from right to left, and in the lower 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from left to right. To do. Not limited to this, the characters "first zone" may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the second zone has been entered. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that it is the second zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "second zone" suggesting the second zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left portion and the right portion of the display screen 7a, respectively. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 when viewed from the player. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 on the left side, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 on the right side, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. Move to. Not limited to this, the characters "second zone" may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also the first state.

[Zone production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect C.
In the zone effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that it is the first zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "first zone" suggesting the first zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally to the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the upper 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from right to left, and in the lower 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from left to right. To do. Not limited to this, the characters "first zone" may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the second zone has entered. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.
Further, in the second zone entry suggestion effect, the accessory movable effect in which the third movable accessory 18 moves to the deployed position is performed. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 is arranged on the second zone entry suggestion image XD3, and the player sees the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 and the decorative symbol 8L within the frame of the third movable accessory 18. , 8C, 8R fluctuation effects are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 and the character CRA are displayed. This second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that it is the second zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "second zone" suggesting the second zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left portion and the right portion of the display screen 7a, respectively. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 when viewed from the player. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 on the left, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 on the right, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. Move to. Not limited to this, the characters "second zone" may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.

Further, in this second zone effect, the third movable accessory 18 is continuously arranged in the deployed position. The character CRA is displayed in the frame of the third movable accessory 18. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the variation effect of the character CRA and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be visually recognized within the frame of the third movable accessory 18.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also the first state.

[Zone production D]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the zone effect D.
In the zone effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96C, the first zone effect is executed. In this first zone effect, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. This first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that it is the first zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "first zone" suggesting the first zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally to the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a, respectively. In the upper 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from right to left, and in the lower 1st zone suggestion image XD2, the character "1st zone" moves from left to right. To do. Not limited to this, the characters "first zone" may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the timer display effect is executed. As for this timer display effect, the timer display XD5 is displayed. This timer display XD5 is displayed between the upper first zone suggestion image XD2 and the lower first zone suggestion image XD2 on the fluctuation region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value changes by the countdown. Represents a timer to do. In the example of FIG. 96 (D), the initial value of the timer display XD5 is 15 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value (for example, zero). The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and suggesting that the second zone has been entered. In this second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the second zone effect is executed. In this second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. This second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that it is the second zone, and specifically, it is an image in which the character "second zone" suggesting the second zone is shown in the band-shaped image. .. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to extend vertically on the left portion and the right portion of the display screen 7a, respectively. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect the first zone suggestion image XD2 when viewed from the player. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2 at the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the second zone suggested image XD4 on the left side, the characters "second zone" move from top to bottom, and in the second zone suggested image XD4 on the right side, the characters "second zone" move from bottom to top. Move to. Not limited to this, the characters "second zone" may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is the state of the second zone. Further, in this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also the first state.

In the zone effects A to D, other effects (such as other zone effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
Further, in the zone effects A to D, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect. Therefore, during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect, of course, the first zone effect is being produced.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the zone effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the zone effect A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the zone effect of the first zone is also performed. That is, when the first zone effect is being performed, the second zone effect is also performed. According to this configuration, since the two zone effects are displayed at the same time, the player can have a great expectation for the future development and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the zone effects A to D, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed in the second zone effect. According to this configuration, since the two zone suggestion images are displayed at the same time, the player can have a great expectation for the future development and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the zone effects A to D, after the first zone rush suggestion effect in which the first zone rush suggestion image XD1 is displayed, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed. According to this configuration, after the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed, so that the player displays the first zone entry suggestion image XD1. At that point, it is possible to have an expectation that it will develop into a second zone production, and as a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the zone effects A to D, the second zone effect is performed after the second zone entry suggestion effect in which the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. According to this configuration, after the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone effect is performed. Therefore, when the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the first zone effect is displayed together with the first zone effect. Since it is confirmed that it will develop into the zone production of 2, as a result, the expectation for the big hit can be increased by the second zone entry suggestion image XD3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 of the first zone effect is displayed, the second zone entry suggestion effect of displaying the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is performed. According to this configuration, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed GW, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, so that the player can overlap the first zone effect and the second zone effect. It is possible to recognize that it will be carried out, and we can have great expectations for future developments. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone effect is performed, the timer display effect for displaying the timer display XD5 is performed, and in the timer display effect, the timer value of the timer display XD5 is a predetermined value (for example). , Zero), the second zone effect (second zone entry suggestion effect) is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value while the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is possible to enter the second zone effect in which the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. When the timer display XD5 is displayed, the player is expected to enter the second zone effect in addition to the first zone effect, and can have a great expectation for future development. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the zone effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are the effects with the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the zone effects A to D, each effect is a plurality of effects. It may be performed across fluctuations (multiple fluctuations of special symbols). For example, in the zone effect D, the first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone effect, and the timer display effect are performed with a predetermined variation, and the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed with the next variation. You may.

[Modification 2]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first zone entry is performed. A timer display effect may be performed before the suggestion effect, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, the first zone entry suggestion effect and the first zone effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, the second zone entry suggestion effect starts, and then the second zone effect is performed, but the timer is not limited to this. When the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the display effect, the second zone effect may be performed without performing the second zone entry suggestion effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs the first zone effect.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-1.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, a first zone display representing the first zone effect is performed, and in the second display effect, a second zone representing the second zone effect is performed. Display is done,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-1 or the aspect XD-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing a first zone entry suggestion display that suggests entering the first zone effect.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing a second zone entry suggestion display that suggests entering the second zone effect.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-4.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XD-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-5.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a timer.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the fifth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value in the fifth display effect. , The second display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

The cut-in effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. This cut-in effect can be performed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the cut-in effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This cut-in effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). The cut-in effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (plural variation effects).

[Cut-in production A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect A.
In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols having the same number, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate to form a reach state. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the left side. In FIG. 97 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is shown by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the upper side. In FIG. 97 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 97 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production B]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect B.
In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols having the same number, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate to form a reach state. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the right side and be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 98 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is shown by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the lower side and be displayed in the buttock toward the upper side. In FIG. 98 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to spread toward the lower left side. Not limited to this, it may appear from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttock recess toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 98 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in this third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production C]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect C.
In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols having the same number, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate to form a reach state. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99C, the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the right side and be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 99 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is shown by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the lower side and be displayed in the buttock toward the upper side. In FIG. 99 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2 is arranged behind the second cut-in display XE2. To. Further, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to spread toward the lower left side. Not limited to this, it may appear from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttock recess toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 99 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in is displayed at the portion intersecting with the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production D]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the cut-in effect D.
In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at the symbols having the same number, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate to form a reach state. Further, in the reach effect, the character CRA is executing a predetermined action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the left side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the right side and be displayed in the buttock toward the left side. In FIG. 100 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is shown by hatching. Further, the character CRA is displayed on the first cut-in display XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in a divergent manner toward the upper side. Not limited to this, the display screen 7a may appear from the lower side and be displayed in the buttock toward the upper side. In FIG. 100 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is shown by hatching different from that of the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in this second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and the portion intersecting with the second cut-in display XE2 is arranged behind the second cut-in display XE2. To. Further, the character CRB is displayed on the second cut-in display XE2. The character CRA displayed on the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed, but is not limited to this, and may be displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and an isopod shape, appears from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed so as to spread toward the lower left side. Not limited to this, it may appear from the diagonally upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttock recess toward the diagonally lower left side. In FIG. 100 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is shown by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are continuously displayed, and the third cut-in is displayed at the portion intersecting with the third cut-in display XE3. It is arranged on the back side of the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the front side to the back side. In addition, the character CRC is displayed on the third cut-in display XE3. The character CRA and the character CRB displayed on the second cut-in display XE2 and the third cut-in display XE3 are not displayed, but are not limited to this, and may be displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed.

In the cut-in effects A to D, other effects (other cut-in effects, etc.) may be incorporated into one effect.
Further, after the cut-in effects A to D, a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect is performed, but the cut-in effects A to D are performed at the final determined effect such as the super reach effect. May be good.
The first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 in the cut-in effects A to D function as chance-up effects, and the more cut-in displays, the higher the expectation of a big hit. It suggests.
In the cut-in effects A to D, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the same. However, the size is not limited to this, and the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be different. For example, the size of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be set as the first cut-in display XE1> the second cut-in display XE2> the third cut-in display XE3. Then, the first cut-in display XE1 <second cut-in display XE2 <third cut-in display XE3 may be set.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the cut-in effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect. Will be done. According to this configuration, since the two cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy the continuous cut-in effects and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is displayed from the lower side to the upper side. Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player executes the continuous cut-in effect toward different positions, he / she can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side, and then in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in is displayed from the lower side to the upper side. Display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player executes the continuous cut-in effect from different positions, he / she can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, then the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed in the second cut-in effect, and then the third cut. In the in-effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the three cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy the three continuous cut-in effects and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in is displayed from the lower side to the upper side in the second cut-in effect. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the diagonally upper right side to the diagonally lower left side. According to this configuration, since the player executes the continuous cut-in effect toward three different positions, he / she can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left side to the right side in the first cut-in effect, and then the second cut-in is displayed from the lower side to the upper side in the second cut-in effect. The display XE2 is displayed, and then, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the diagonally upper right side to the diagonally lower left side. According to this configuration, since the player executes the continuous cut-in effect from three different positions, he / she can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the cut-in effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are the start position and the end of the cut-in display, respectively. The positions are different, but not limited to this, the start position of the cut-in display may be the same and the end position may be different, or the start position of the cut-in display may be different and the end position may be the same. Alternatively, the start position and end position of the cut-in display may be the same.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing the first cut-in display.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second cut-in display.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-1.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward the first position, and in the second display effect, a second position different from the first position. The second cut-in display is made toward the position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-2.
In the combination effect, the first cut-in display is performed from the third position to the first position in the first display effect, and the third position is displayed in the second display effect. The second cut-in display is performed from the fourth position different from the above to the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing a third cut-in display.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-4.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward the first position and the fifth position different from the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XE-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-5.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the third cut-in display is performed from the third position and the sixth position different from the fourth position toward the fifth position. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern variation display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104. This decorative symbol variation display effect is related to the variation display of a decorative symbol having a probabilistic symbol and a non-probable variation symbol, which is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). Can be executed. More specifically, this decorative symbol variation display effect is an effect executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol that is integrally displayed with the character or non-character.

[Decorative pattern variation display production A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 101 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect indicates that the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 101 (A) has stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are arranged in a lost symbol arrangement ( It indicates that it stopped at "689"). In this example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, with odd numbers being probabilistic symbols and even numbers being normal symbols. That is, the jackpot symbol arrangements "111", "333", "555", "777", and "999" are probabilistic jackpots ("777" is "16RV planned jackpot", and "333" is "16R (actually 15R) V". "Scheduled passing jackpot", "111", "555", "999" is "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot"), jackpot symbol arrangement "222", "444", "666", "888" is normal It is a big hit ("16R (actual 13R) V non-passing big hit").
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue number part SB as a symbol (shown in white) and a non-character part imitating a flame. The NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the probability variation symbol is displayed as a symbol in which the red number part SR (indicated by hatching) and the non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number part SB of the normal symbol and the number part SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by a few frames), and are the definite symbols. It does not indicate the result of fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped in the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B) to become a finalized symbol, and the result of the variation is the player It is a production to notify to. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped by the probabilistic symbol is changed. It is shown. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol confirmation effect is performed. To do. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size substantially half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The character unit CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol “9”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 101 (C), start to change. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as the probabilistic pattern is changed among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalizing effect shown in FIG. 101 (C). It is shown how it was done. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed becomes a symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop the decorative symbol variation shown in FIG. 101 (B) from the display mode of the decorative symbol confirmation effect shown in FIG. 101 (C). It is designed to return to the display mode of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 101 (A) described above. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probabilistic symbol is definitely displayed, the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. The fluctuation is started after the pattern is changed to the same pattern and the number part SR is enlarged to change the size to almost the same size as the number part SB. That is, immediately before the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probabilistic symbol changes to the display mode in the temporarily stopped state.

[Decorative pattern variation display production B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect B.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 102 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 102 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "9 ↓ 9". As described above, "9" is a probability variation symbol, that is, in this reach effect, a reach symbol array that becomes a probability variation jackpot when a jackpot is hit is shown. Therefore, in this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R forming the reach symbol arrangement have a red number part SR as a symbol (indicated by hatching) and a non-character part NC imitating a flame. Is displayed as a symbol that is integrally displayed with, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. The decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the reach symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach symbol change effect, it is shown that the display mode of the probabilistic symbol (left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R) stopped in the reach symbol arrangement (“9 ↓ 9”) has changed. That is, when the probability variation symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed reaches, the display mode changes to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size substantially half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). Further, the character unit CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is produced by stopping the middle decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. , Indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. In this example, it is shown that the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the probabilistic symbol "7", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop at the lost symbol arrangement ("979", reach lost symbol arrangement). Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped at the symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, are in the middle. When the decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the display mode changes from a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, and the numbers are displayed. The size of the portion SR is enlarged and returns to the size at the time of the reach effect shown in FIG. 102 (B). That is, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), when all the decorative symbols have stopped changing, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are symbols in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. The number part SR has a display mode that is substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal symbol and is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames), and are the definite symbols. It does not indicate the result of fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped in the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) to become a finalized symbol, and the result of the variation is given to the player. It is a production to notify. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, it is shown that the display modes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) have changed. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect are all probabilistic symbols, the display mode of all the decorative symbols is shown to have changed in this decorative symbol final effect. That is, when the decorative symbol finalization effect is performed on the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, the display mode is such that the number part SR and the character part CA9 are displayed in the decorative symbol 8L and 8R. The decorative symbol 8C changes to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character parts CA7 and CA9 in a size approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The character unit CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol “7”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 102 (E), start to change. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, it is shown that the display modes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 102 (E) have changed. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been confirmed and stopped in the decorative symbol confirmation effect, are all probabilistic symbols, in this decorative symbol variation start effect, it is shown that the display modes of all the decorative symbols have changed. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed on the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the character parts CA7 and CA9 are integrally displayed, the display mode is that the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. It changes to a pattern. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop the decorative symbol variation shown in FIG. 102 (D) from the display mode of the decorative symbol confirmation effect shown in FIG. 102 (E). It is designed to return to the display mode of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 102 (A) described above. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probabilistic symbol is definitely displayed, the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. The fluctuation is started after the pattern is changed to the same pattern and the number part SR is enlarged to change the size to almost the same size as the number part SB. That is, immediately before the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probabilistic symbol changes to the display mode in the temporarily stopped state.

[Decorative pattern variation display production C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect C.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 103 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect indicates that the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103 (A) has stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are arranged in a lost pattern ( It indicates that it stopped at "689"). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probabilistic symbol.
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue number part SB as a symbol (shown in white) and a non-character part imitating a flame. The NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the probability variation symbol is displayed as a symbol in which the red number part SR (indicated by hatching) and the non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number part SB of the normal symbol and the number part SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames), and are the definite symbols. It does not indicate the result of fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped in the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B) to become a finalized symbol, and the result of the variation is the player It is a production to notify to. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped by the probabilistic symbol is changed. It is shown. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol confirmation effect is performed. To do. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size substantially half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The character unit CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol “9”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the decorative symbol variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation start effect is an effect performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalization effect shown in FIG. 103 (C), start to change. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalizing effect shown in FIG. 103 (C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as the probabilistic symbol is changed. It is shown how it was done. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed becomes a symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed. Change. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop the decorative symbol variation shown in FIG. 103 (B) from the display mode of the decorative symbol confirmation effect shown in FIG. 103 (C). It is designed to return to the display mode of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 103 (A) described above. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probabilistic symbol is definitely displayed, the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. The fluctuation is started after the pattern is changed to the same pattern and the number part SR is enlarged to change the size to almost the same size as the number part SB. That is, immediately before the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probabilistic symbol changes to the display mode in the temporarily stopped state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol enlargement stop effect indicates that the decorative symbol enlargement stop effect has stopped the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103 (E). Here, the decorative symbol 8L, It shows that 8C and 8R stopped in the lost symbol arrangement ("678"). This decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), but the difference is that the normal symbols are stopped at the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle is medium. The probabilistic pattern is stopped at the decorative pattern 8C. Here, when the probability variation symbol stops at the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the number part SR of the probability variation symbol is the normal symbol as compared with the case where the probability variation symbol stops at the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 103 (B). It is displayed larger than the number part SB. That is, when the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol 8C) stops at the probabilistic symbol, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) and the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) stop at the probabilistic symbol. , The number part SR is displayed large. In this case, the number part SR is displayed so as to partially protrude from the display area of the non-character part NC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the decorative symbol finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped in the decorative symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (F) to become a finalized symbol, and the result of the change is determined by the player. It is a production to notify to. In this decorative symbol finalization effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol enlargement stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (F), the display mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C stopped by the probabilistic symbol is changed. It is shown. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed when the decorative symbol confirmation effect is performed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character portion CA7 in a size approximately half the size of the number portion SB of the normal symbol. The character unit CA7 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol “7”.
[Decorative pattern variation display production D]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect D.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 104 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol variation stop effect indicates that the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are arranged in a lost symbol arrangement ( It indicates that it stopped at "689"). As described above, "6" and "8" are normal symbols, and "9" is a probabilistic symbol.
In this decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, as shown in the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C, the normal symbol is a blue number part SB as a symbol (shown in white) and a non-character part imitating a flame. The NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number part SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC. As shown in the right decorative symbol 8R, the probability variation symbol is displayed as a symbol in which the red number part SR (indicated by hatching) and the non-character part NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed, and the number part SR. Is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The number part SB of the normal symbol and the number part SR of the probability variation symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by a few frames), and are the definite symbols. It does not indicate the result of fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the stop symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this stop symbol change effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped by the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped by the probability variation symbol is changed. It is shown. That is, the probabilistic symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed when the stop symbol change effect is performed. To do. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size substantially half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. In the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames), and the fluctuation is defined as a definite symbol. It does not show the result of. Further, the character unit CA9 is a dedicated character corresponding to the probability variation symbol "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the pseudo continuous start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This pseudo-ream start effect is an effect performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C) start the pseudo-ream.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol appears to be continuous for a predetermined number of times, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the variation, during the reach effect, when the variation is stopped, and the like. For example, the pseudo-ream effect is an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping all the decorative symbols after starting to fluctuate the decorative symbols, an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols, in advance. An effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping a fixed logo (for example, NEXT), or an effect of executing a variable effect of a decorative pattern along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", "pseudo". including. It should be noted that the number of times of repeated production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-reams, and if it is twice, it may be expressed as "pseudo 2" or "x2", and if it is three times, it may be expressed as "pseudo3" or "x3".
In this pseudo continuous start effect, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C), the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the probabilistic variation symbol has changed. The situation is shown. That is, when the pseudo-continuous start effect is performed, the display mode of the probability variation symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. To do. At this time, the number portion SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC in substantially the same size as the number portion SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the pseudo continuous start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) from the display mode of the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C). It is designed to return to the display mode of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), a pseudo continuous variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pseudo-continuous variation effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is performed. That is, for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the symbol array including the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed when the pseudo-continuous variation is started, the number part SR and the non-character part NC integrate the probabilistic symbol. After changing to the displayed pattern, and after expanding the number part SR to change it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the re-variation is started. That is, immediately before the start of re-variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the probabilistic symbol changes to the display mode at the time of the decorative symbol variation stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B). As described above, the display mode when the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (E) in the decorative symbol variation display effect D is shown in FIG. 101 (A) in the decorative symbol variation display effect A described above. The display mode is the same as that shown in (E), which is the same as the variable effect of the decorative pattern that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. As a result, even when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo-continuous production that makes the player appear as if the variable display of the decorative design (special design) was actually performed multiple times. Can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. That is, in this example, the reach effect is executed after the pseudo-ream count is performed twice. This reach effect shows that in the pseudo-continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "9 ↓ 9". As described above, "9" is a probability variation symbol, that is, in this reach effect, a reach symbol array that becomes a probability variation jackpot when a jackpot is hit is shown. The decorative symbol 8C indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward). In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is produced by stopping the middle decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 104 (F) are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. , Indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. In this example, it is shown that the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the probability variation symbol "9", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop at the probability variation jackpot symbol array "999". Here, in this jackpot symbol expansion stop effect, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol stops at the probabilistic symbol and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array is displayed, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are of the probabilistic symbol. The number part SR is enlarged and displayed larger than the number part SB of the normal symbol. In other words, the number part SR of the probability variation symbol is enlarged and displayed larger than the number portion SR of the probability variation symbol shown in FIGS. 104 (B), (D), and (F). Further, in this case, the number part SR is displayed so as to partially protrude from the display area of the non-character part NC. In the jackpot symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames), and the fluctuations as confirmed symbols. It does not show the result of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped in the jackpot symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) to become a finalized symbol, and the result of the fluctuation becomes a probabilistic jackpot. It is a production that notifies the player that it has become. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the probabilistic symbols stopped by the jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) all show that the display mode has changed. That is, when the jackpot confirmation effect is performed, the display mode of the probability variation symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed. .. At this time, the size of the number part SR is reduced, and the number part SR is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size substantially half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group, and when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group becomes a big hit, , The privilege given to the player is set more advantageously than when the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a big hit, and the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is the first in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed. It is an aspect symbol, and the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, and as one of the plurality of display effects, the first symbol group The decorative symbol may be displayed as a third aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group in which the privilege given to the player is advantageously set is displayed in the third aspect symbol instead of the first aspect symbol at a predetermined timing, so that the player It is also possible to give the player a feeling of a big hit by changing the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol in relation to the fluctuation start, and is involved in the fluctuation stop. The structure is such that the third aspect symbol is changed to the first aspect symbol. Further, the first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is displayed the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. It is configured to be. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group has a display mode in which the symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed, similar to the decorative symbol of the second symbol group, during the rapid fluctuation, and the first symbol and the non-character are displayed. The 1st symbol will be displayed the same as or larger than the 2nd symbol. As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the trend of the first symbol, which is directly linked to the privilege grant, even when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changing. On the other hand, during the suspension of fluctuation without movement, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is different from the decorative symbol of the second symbol group, and the symbol and the character are displayed integrally, and the first symbol is also the first. It will be displayed smaller than 2 symbols. As a result, while the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped fluctuating, the first symbol is displayed small and the character is highlighted, and the player is most interested in the first symbol of the first symbol group, which is directly linked to the privilege grant. It becomes possible to carefully visually recognize and pay attention to the character associated with. That is, the player can grasp the first symbol only by looking at the character. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the decorative symbols stop fluctuating in a predetermined symbol arrangement and the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are included, once. When the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the third aspect symbol, and then the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is determined by the symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is set. It is configured to change from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol. After that, when the decorative symbol of the determined symbol arrangement starts to change, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol. According to this configuration, the player can use the first symbol group in the predetermined symbol arrangement that has stopped fluctuating when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is included when the decorative symbol has stopped fluctuating in the predetermined symbol arrangement. The first symbol of the above can be easily confirmed, and the character associated with the first symbol in the determined predetermined symbol arrangement can be easily confirmed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group stopped in the reach symbol arrangement is the first. When the 1st aspect symbol is changed to the 3rd aspect symbol, and then the final stop symbol stops and fluctuates (temporarily stops) in a predetermined symbol arrangement, the decorative symbol of the 1st aspect group is changed from the 3rd aspect symbol to the 1st aspect symbol. Change to a mode pattern. Next, when the decorative symbol is determined by the stopped (temporarily stopped) symbol array, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol, and then the determined symbol array is determined. When the decorative symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is displayed as the third aspect symbol instead of the first aspect symbol, thereby playing a game. It is possible to improve the jackpot expectation of the person's reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, when the final stop symbol stops at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, or the jackpot symbol arrangement (probability change) at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group. When the jackpot symbol array) is displayed, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is displayed integrally with the non-character by changing (enlarging) the size of the first symbol (a part from the non-character display area). It is configured to be displayed in the fourth aspect symbol (displayed by protruding). According to this configuration, when the final stop symbol and the jackpot symbol array (probability variation jackpot symbol array), which are directly linked to the privilege grant, are the decorative symbols of the first symbol group, the size of the first symbol changes (enlarges). ) Is displayed, which makes it possible to change the variable display of the decorative symbol and improve the expectation of the player. In addition, the player can easily confirm the decorative symbol of the first symbol group and grasp the fluctuation result. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the decorative symbol starts the pseudo-continuous variation, when the symbol arrangement including the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped and displayed, the first symbol is displayed. After changing the decorative symbol of one symbol group to the third aspect symbol and enlarging the first symbol, the revariation is started. According to this configuration, the display mode when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is the same as the display mode of the actual variation effect of the decorative pattern which is repeatedly performed when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. As a result, even when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo-continuous production that makes the player look as if the variable display of the decorative design (special design) was performed multiple times in a realistic manner. Can be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, in the decorative symbols, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol), the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol), and the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) In any case, when the symbol that has stopped fluctuating is a probabilistic symbol, the number and non-character are once stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol that is displayed integrally, and then the number and character are displayed integrally. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the final stop symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) may be changed to a symbol in which numbers and characters are integrally displayed. Since the final stop symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) is the symbol of greatest interest to the player, for example, in the reach state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the display mode in this way.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, odd numbers are probabilistic symbols, even numbers are normal symbols, probabilistic symbols are red, and normal symbols are blue to display numbers as symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol may be a character other than a number, a mark, or an image (icon) of an object or an article having a specific shape. In addition, in the probability variation symbol, the characters that are displayed integrally with the numbers are displayed in the same size, but the probability variation symbol (for example, "3", "7") that gives the player a privilege when a big hit is made is advantageous. ) May display the character larger than other probabilistic symbols.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the final stop symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) stops at the probabilistic symbol, the size of the number of the probabilistic symbol changes (enlarges) and is non-character However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the privilege given to the player when a big hit is stopped at an advantageous probability variation symbol (for example, "3", "7"), the size of the number of the probability variation symbol may be changed (enlarged). Good. In this case, the probability variation symbol may be only when the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) is used, or when the probability variation symbol is the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol) or the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol). It may be. Alternatively, when the final stop symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) stops at the probabilistic symbol, the probabilistic symbol has the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol) and the second stop that are stopped without changing the size of the numbers. The number of the symbol (right decorative symbol) may be reduced.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the jackpot symbol array (probability variation jackpot symbol array) is displayed in the probability variation symbol, the size of the number of the probability variation symbol changes (enlarges). It is displayed integrally with the non-character (a part of it is displayed outside the display area of the non-character), but in this case, in the reach state before the jackpot symbol array (probability variation jackpot symbol array) is displayed, The number of the probabilistic symbol that becomes the jackpot among the fluctuating final stop symbols may be enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, the numbers of all the probabilistic symbols among the fluctuating final stop symbols may be enlarged and displayed, or the numbers of all the final stop symbols may be enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the symbol that has stopped fluctuating is a probabilistic symbol, it is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol in which numbers and non-characters are integrally displayed. Later, the number and the character were changed to the integrated display, but in this case, when the number and the character were changed to the integrated display, and the character was in the predetermined display mode ( For example, the character's color may change to red, the character's face may change to a smile), and subsequent fluctuations (including re-variation such as pseudo-ream) may result in reach or jackpot. That is, the character may be changed to a predetermined display mode to suggest reach or jackpot.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, in the pseudo-continuous production, the numbers and the non-characters are integrally displayed, and the probabilistic symbol that is temporarily stopped is once the numbers and the character portion are integrally displayed. It changed to a symbol, and then returned to the symbol in which the numbers and non-characters were displayed integrally to perform re-variation (hereinafter, also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous production), but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the pseudo-continuous production, the probability variation symbol in which the numbers and the non-characters are integrally displayed and temporarily stopped is re-variated as it is without changing to the symbol in which the numbers and the character portion are integrally displayed (hereinafter, the first). (Also called 2 pseudo-continuous production). Then, in this case, when the first pseudo-continuous production is performed, it becomes a reach or a big hit in the subsequent re-variation, and when the second pseudo-continuous production is performed, it becomes non-reach in the subsequent re-variation. It may be. That is, the reach or the jackpot may be suggested by performing the first pseudo-continuous production.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
Display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
The decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group.
When the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a big hit, the privilege given to the player is set more advantageously than when the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a big hit.
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed.
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
The display means can execute a predetermined first decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
In the first decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group may be displayed as a third aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D3-2]
In the first decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first aspect symbol to the third aspect symbol in relation to the start of fluctuation, and from the third aspect symbol in relation to the stop of fluctuation. Change to the first aspect pattern,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1.
[Aspect D3-3]
The first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
[Aspect D3-4]
Display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
The decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group.
When the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a big hit, the privilege given to the player is set more advantageously than when the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a big hit.
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first aspect symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed.
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second aspect symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
The display means can execute a predetermined second decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
In the second decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group may be displayed as a fourth aspect symbol in which the size of the first symbol changes and is integrally displayed with the non-character.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D3-5]
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a probabilistic symbol, the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a non-probable variable symbol, the first symbol and the second symbol are numbers, and the numbers of the first symbol The numbers of the second symbol are different in color.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4.

The game state suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. This game state suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the end of the time-saving game performed after the jackpot game, and more specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game ends, the game state is low. It is a production that suggests whether it is (normal state) or high accuracy (latent probability change state).

[Game state suggestion production A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect A.
In the game state suggestion effect A, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol array "777" is a "16RV passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. ) Is a big hit. The jackpot symbol array "333" is a "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" (probability variation jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is in a high probability time saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot. It is a big hit. The jackpot symbol array other than "777" and "333" is a jackpot that becomes "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latent jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot). Is. "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" (latent jackpot) will be in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot game ends. After that, it becomes a high probability low base state (latent probability change state). "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot) will be in a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot game ends. After that, it becomes a low probability low base state (normal state).
In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "555". Here, as described above, in this jackpot symbol arrangement, "555" is "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latent jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot). ), And the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and the effect related to this jackpot game is executed on the display screen 7a, although not shown. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving start effect, the decorative symbol variation effect in the high accuracy and high base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high accuracy state even if the player can recognize the time saving state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. In addition, in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time reduction number display ZT indicating the remaining time reduction number is displayed, and here, the time reduction number display ZT starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol after shifting to the time reduction state. Since it is a case (when the number of time reductions has not been digested even once), "100" as a default value is shown.

Next, after the time saving start effect is executed, the time saving game is started, and if the special symbol is changed 100 times in this time saving game, that is, if the jackpot is not achieved during the time saving game, , As shown in FIG. 105 (C), the time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead, the characters "time saving end" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" of the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the time saving end variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time reduction end time variation effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the same fluctuation time as in the normal state, that is, at a fluctuation time longer than during the time reduction game. Further, on the display screen 7a, a specific image KSG1 with a "mountain" as a motif is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image KSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time reduction game is completed (after the time reduction end variation effect is performed), as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the game state suggestion effect A, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is completed, the current game state is low accuracy (normal state) or high accuracy (normal state) using the specific image KSG1. It is designed to perform a latent probability change suggestion effect, which will be described later, to suggest whether it is a latent probability change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (E), since the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is completed, the variation display of the special symbol is the remaining 9 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect. The number "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (missing symbols) every time the special symbol variation display is performed once after the time saving game is completed, until the latent probability change suggestion effect. A large number indicating the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the numbers indicating the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect are displayed, and the specific image KSG1 is temporarily deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the countdown variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time fluctuation effect, the number is switched to the number indicating the countdown up to the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (E), and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image KSG1 once erased by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown effect and the countdown variation effect are alternately repeated, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is completed, then, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the display screen. In 7a, a countdown effect is executed in which a number “0” indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is 0 times remaining until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has been completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability change suggestion effect, when the current gaming state is high probability (latent probability change state), the color of the specific image KSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red), and low probability (normal state). In this case, by not changing the color of the specific image KSG1, an effect suggesting whether the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (latent probability change state) is performed. In this example, as described in FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally set as a latent jackpot. Therefore, in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (H), FIG. 105 (D) ), The white specific image KSG1 shown in (F) is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is highly accurate (latent probability variation state). Assuming that the jackpot symbol array "555" is internally a normal jackpot, the white specific images shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and (F) are shown in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (H). KSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state).

[Game state suggestion production B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect B.
In the game state suggestion effect B, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "555". Here, as described above, in this jackpot symbol arrangement, "555" is "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latent jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot). ), And the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and the effect related to this jackpot game is executed on the display screen 7a, although not shown. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the time saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving start effect, the decorative symbol variation effect in the high accuracy and high base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high accuracy state even if the player can recognize the time saving state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. In addition, in the upper right of the display screen 7a, the time reduction number display ZT indicating the remaining time reduction number is displayed, and here, the time reduction number display ZT starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol after shifting to the time reduction state. Since it is a case (when the number of time reductions has not been digested even once), "100" as a default value is shown. Further, on the upper left of the display screen 7a, it is shown that the effect mode performed from this time saving start effect is mode A. Mode A is an effect with a "mountain" as a motif, and in this time-saving start effect, a specific image imitating a "mountain" below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is used. KSG1 is displayed.

Next, after the time saving start effect is executed, the time saving game is started, and when the special symbol is changed 50 times in this time saving game, the effect mode is changed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 106 (C). The production is executed. This effect mode change effect is an effect of changing the effect mode from mode A to mode B, and the effect of mode A with the motif of "mountain" is changed to the effect of mode B with the motif of "tree". .. That is, mode B is an effect with a "tree" as a motif, which is performed when the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this case) after the time saving game is started, and this effect mode change effect. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image RSG1 imitating a “tree” is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in place of the specific image KSG1. The specific image RSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

Next, if the special symbol is changed 100 times in the time-saving game (the special symbol is changed 50 times from the effect mode change effect), that is, if the jackpot is not achieved during the time-saving game, the figure is shown. As shown in 106 (D), the time saving end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead, the characters "time saving end" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and "0" is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" of the time saving number display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the time saving end variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time reduction end time variation effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started at the same fluctuation time as in the normal state, that is, at a fluctuation time longer than during the time reduction game. The mode B is maintained as the effect mode, and a specific image RSG1 imitating a "tree" is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as in the time-saving game.

Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time reduction game is completed (after the time reduction end variation effect is performed), as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the game state suggestion effect B, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is completed, the current game state is low accuracy (normal state) or high accuracy (normal state) using the specific image RSG1. It is designed to perform a latent probability change suggestion effect, which will be described later, to suggest whether it is a latent probability change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F), since the variation display of the special symbol is performed once after the time saving game is completed, the variation display of the special symbol is the remaining 9 times until the latent probability change suggestion effect. The number "9" is displayed. In other words, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (missing symbols) every time the special symbol variation display is performed once after the time saving game is completed, until the latent probability change suggestion effect. A large number indicating the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the numbers indicating the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect are displayed, and the specific image RSG1 is temporarily deleted.

Next, although not shown here, as shown in FIG. 105 (F) above, the countdown time variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this countdown time fluctuation effect, the number is switched to the number indicating the countdown up to the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (F), and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image RSG1 once erased by the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F) is also displayed again.

After that, the countdown effect and the countdown variation effect are alternately repeated, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 10 times after the time saving game is completed, then, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the display screen. In 7a, a countdown effect is executed in which a number “0” indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is 0 times remaining until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has been completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability change suggestion effect, when the current game state is high probability (latent probability change state), the color of the specific image RSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, changed from white to red), and low probability (normal state). In this case, by not changing the color of the specific image RSG1, an effect suggesting whether the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (latent probability change state) is performed. In this example, as described in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally regarded as a latent jackpot. Therefore, in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (H), FIG. 106 (C) ), The white specific image RSG1 shown in (E) is changed to the red specific image RSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is highly accurate (latent probability variation state). Assuming that the jackpot symbol array "555" is internally a normal jackpot, the white specific images shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and 106 (E) are shown in the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (H). RSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state).

[Game state suggestion production C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect C.
In the game state suggestion effect C, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "555". Here, as described above, in this jackpot symbol arrangement, "555" is "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latent jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot). ), And the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot game production, the characters "Big hit game start!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen 7, and the jackpot symbol array OZH ("555") that became the jackpot this time is displayed in the upper right of the display screen 7a. It is displayed. In the jackpot game production, productions such as opening production, round production, and ending production are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the selected image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This selected image display effect is an effect performed as one of the jackpot game effects performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during the round effect), and a plurality of selected images SG1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Display SG2, SG3, and SG4. The selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images containing the characters "CHANGE" in the display area. The selected image SG1 is red, the selected image SG2 is green, the selected image SG1 is yellow, and the selected image SG1 is blue. It is displayed in. Here, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images suggesting a gaming state after the jackpot game, and more specifically, the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a probable (high accuracy) state This is a suggestive image. The magnitude of this degree of expectation is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG4 (blue) (for example, the gaming state after the jackpot game is The probability of becoming a probable change (high probability) state is selected image SG1: 80%, selected image SG2: 60%, selected image SG3: 40%> selected image SG4: 20%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this button effect, an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 shown in FIG. 107 (C) are temporarily erased, the button image BOG is in the center of the display screen 7a, and the "button PUSH! Is displayed. A meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggestion effect is an effect in which any of the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 is displayed as a result of the player pressing the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63. In addition, here, it is shown that the selected image SG1 (red) is selected and displayed based on the fact that it is internally a probability jackpot (internally it is a probability variation or a latent jackpot). If so, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG1 (red)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG4 (blue), and is normally (low accuracy) internally. When it is a big hit, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of selected image SG4 (blue)> selected image SG3 (yellow)> selected image SG2 (green)> selected image SG1 (red)).

After that, the jackpot game is completed, and although not shown, the display screen 7a shows the time reduction start effect, the time reduction end effect, the time reduction end time variation effect, the countdown effect, and the countdown, as in FIGS. 105 (B) to (G) above. Time-varying effect and countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), on the display screen 7a, the same latent probability change suggestion effect as in FIG. 105 (H) is executed. That is, the white specific image KSG1 is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is highly accurate (latent probability variation state). That is, when the selection image SG1 (red) with the highest expectation that the game state after the big hit game becomes a probable change (high probability) state is selected in the game state suggestion effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), FIG. Like the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in 107 (F), there is a high probability that an effect suggesting that the current gaming state is high probability (latent probability change state) will be executed.

On the other hand, in the game state suggestion effect, it is assumed that the selected image SG4 (blue) is selected and displayed instead of FIG. 107 (E) as shown in FIG. 107 (G) (however, in this case, the above It is assumed that the jackpot symbol array "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot)).

After that, the jackpot game is completed, and although not shown, the display screen 7a shows the time reduction start effect, the time reduction end effect, the time reduction end time variation effect, the countdown effect, and the countdown, as in FIGS. 105 (B) to (G) above. Time-varying effect and countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), on the display screen 7a, the specific image KSG1 is maintained as white without changing the white specific image KSG1 to the red specific image KSG2. Is executed. That is, the latent probability change suggestion effect suggesting that the current game state is low probability (normal state) is executed. That is, when the selection image SG4 (blue) with the lowest expectation that the game state after the big hit game becomes a probability change (high probability) state is selected in the game state suggestion effect shown in FIG. Like the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in 107 (H), there is a high probability that an effect suggesting that the current gaming state is low probability (normal state) will be executed.

[Game state suggestion production D]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the game state suggestion effect D.
In the game state suggestion effect D, although not shown, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed, and while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, they are displayed so as to scroll downward. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was a jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 108 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "555". Here, as described above, in this jackpot symbol arrangement, "555" is "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" (latent jackpot) or "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" (normal jackpot). ), And the jackpot symbol array "555" here is "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" (latent jackpot).

Next, the jackpot game is started, and on the display screen 7a, although not shown, the jackpot game effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 107 (B). In this jackpot game production, productions such as opening production, round production, and ending production are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the character selection effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character selection effect is an effect performed as one of the jackpot game effects performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during the round effect), and a plurality of selected characters are displayed on the display screen 7a. .. In this example, two selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed as selected characters. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed with the selected character CRA in the display area on the left half of the screen and the selected character CRB in the display area on the right half of the screen. In addition, characters suggesting the operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed above the selected characters CRA and CRB, and the characters "blow" are displayed for the selected character CRA and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed for the selected character CRB. ing. Further, characters indicating the names of the characters are displayed below the selected characters CRA and CRB, and the characters "OARO" are displayed in the selected character CRA and the characters "JARO" are displayed in the selected character CRB. When this character selection effect is executed, the player operates the select button 68 to select either the selected character CRA or CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the character determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character determination effect, the character selected by the player in the character selection effect is displayed, and here, it is assumed that the selected character CRA is selected and displayed. That is, in the character determination effect, among the selected characters CRA and CRB displayed in the character selection effect, the unselected selected character CRB is deleted from the display screen 7a, and the selected selected character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the center. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the characters "blow" and "OARO" are displayed together with the selected character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRA displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect causes the player to press the effect button 63 once due to the "blow" that suggests the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRA. Specifically, the button image BOG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the characters "button PUSH!" Are displayed above the button image BOG. A meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), the game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this game state suggestion effect, as a result of the player pressing the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63, an image suggesting the game state after the big hit game is displayed. More specifically, it is an image suggesting the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a probabilistic (high accuracy) state. In this example, the image suggesting the game state after the jackpot game is the expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 displayed in red including the characters "CHANGE" in the display area. Here, the expectation suggestion image is the expectation suggestion image KSG2 displayed in green, which has a different magnitude of expectation from red, the expectation suggestion image KSG3 displayed in yellow, and the expectation suggestion image displayed in blue. Four types of KSG4 are available. The magnitude of this expectation is in the order of expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red)> expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue) (for example). , The probability that the game state after the jackpot game will be in a probable (highly probable) state is expected degree suggestion image KSG1: 80%, expectation degree suggestion image KSG2: 60%, expectation degree suggestion image KSG3: 40%> expectation degree suggestion image. KSG4: 20%). The reason why the expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red) was selected in this game state suggestion effect is based on the fact that it is a latent jackpot internally (internally, it becomes a probability variation or a latent jackpot). When present, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red)> expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue). When it is a normal (low accuracy) jackpot internally, the magnitude of the selection probability is the expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue)> expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> Expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red) in that order).

On the other hand, in the character determination effect, it is assumed that the selected character CRB is selected and displayed instead of FIG. 108 (C) as shown in FIG. 108 (F) (however, in this case, the jackpot symbol array described above is used. "555" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" (normal jackpot)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (G), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRB displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. That is, this button effect causes the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63 due to the "continuous hit" that suggests the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRB. Specifically, a plurality of button image BOGs and the characters "PUSH" are repeatedly displayed on the display screen 7a while changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (H), the game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggestion effect is the same as in FIG. 108 (E), and as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, an image suggesting the game state after the big hit game is displayed. In this example, as the image suggesting the gaming state after the jackpot game, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG4 displayed in blue including the characters "CHANGE" in the display area is shown. The reason why the expected degree suggestion image KSG4 (blue) was selected in this game state suggestion effect is based on the fact that it is usually a big hit internally.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game state suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, in the time-saving game, the gaming state is a low-accuracy time-saving state (low-accuracy high-base state) and a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state). When the time-saving game is completed, in the low-probability time-saving, the game state becomes the low-probability low-based normal state, and in the high-probability time-saving, the game state is hidden in the probability change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state. When the latent probability change state of high accuracy and low base is reached and a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time saving game is completed, the game state suggestion effect suggesting whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time saving game is completed, the player can determine whether the current game state is low probability (normal state) or high probability (latent probability change state). it can. As a result, the player can face the game with great joy when there is a suggestion of high accuracy (latent probability change state) in the game state suggestion effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the time saving game is completed. There is a configuration in which a countdown display is performed for each change of the special symbol from the end of the time saving game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. According to this configuration, the player can easily grasp how many times the variation display of the special symbol is executed after the time saving game is completed to perform the game state suggestion effect. In addition, this countdown display (particularly, the countdown display immediately before the game state suggestion effect is performed) can give the player a feeling of excitement and excitement as to whether or not the game state is probable, and the player can perform the game state suggestion effect. It is possible to effectively suppress oversight. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a specific image that changes according to the effect mode is displayed, and the game state suggestion effect is when the game state is in the normal state and when the latent probability change state. By changing the display mode of the specific image, it is suggested whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. According to this configuration, the player can very easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state only by recognizing that the display mode of the specific image has changed. Further, since the specific image changes according to the effect mode, it is possible to perform a game state suggestion effect that matches (harmonizes) with the effect mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, during the execution of the jackpot game, a plurality of selected images suggesting a gaming state after the jackpot game are displayed, and a plurality of selected images are selected from the plurality of selected images. The selected image is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the game state after the big hit game. According to this configuration, the player can predict the game state after the jackpot game during the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, when it is suggested that the game state after the big hit game is highly accurate, the game can be played with great joy. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 108, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button that can be operated by the player, displays a plurality of characters that can be selected by the player during execution of the jackpot game, and among the plurality of characters. The operation of the effect button is different according to the character selected from, and the button effect is performed, and after the button effect is completed, the game state after the big hit game is suggested. According to this configuration, the player can be made to operate different effect buttons according to the selected character. In addition, the player can select a character who can operate the effect button, which he is good at, and expect the suggestion of the game state after the big hit game to be performed after that. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the game state suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the specific image is displayed after the end of the time reduction or after the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be continuously displayed in all game states. Further, although the specific image is automatically changed according to the effect mode, the effect mode may be selectable by the player so that the player can select the specific image of his / her preference.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in the gaming state suggestion effect, the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the time-saving game is completed as the predetermined condition is satisfied. Although it is sometimes done, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has passed since the time-saving game is completed, when a predetermined winning opening is won (a predetermined number of prizes are won) after the time-saving game is completed, or when the time-saving game is completed. It may be when a predetermined effect (including reach) is performed after that, or when the variable display of symbols other than the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, after the countdown display is performed for each change of the special symbol from the end of the time saving game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Although the game state suggestion effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display may be a countup display. Further, the countdown display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, the countdown display may be displayed so as to extend beyond the display screen. In this way, a powerful countdown display can be performed, and the player can be further appealed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the gaming state suggestion effect suggests whether or not the current gaming state is probable by changing the color of the specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state suggestion effect suggests whether or not the current game state is probable by changing the pattern of the specific image to a different pattern or changing the specific image to a stereoscopic image (3D). You may. Alternatively, the color and size of the countdown display described above, that is, the display mode of the countdown display may indicate whether or not the current game state is probable. Further, in the above embodiment, the specific image is displayed on the lower center side of the display screen 7a, but the display position of the specific image may be arbitrary, and the display position of the specific image may change or the specific image may be displayed. May move. Further, the high-accuracy suggestion by the specific image may be continued until the next big hit, or may be continued until the number of changes in the special figure after that reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the effect mode is illustrated with the motif of "mountain" or "tree", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be a motif of various characters. Then, in this case, the specific image that changes according to the effect mode may be displayed as a character image.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a plurality of selected images are displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the selected images selected from the plurality of selected images through the button effect are used to play the game after the jackpot game. Although the state is suggested, in this case, a plurality of selected images may be sequentially lit and displayed, and the selected images lit at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63 may be selected. Alternatively, a plurality of selected images may be rotated and displayed so that the selected images at the selected positions are selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. In this way, the selected image desired by the player can be selected by the player himself through technical intervention. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the expectation degree suggestion image displayed (selected) in the game state suggestion effect during the execution of the jackpot game is an internal jackpot type (the jackpot is probable changed). Whether or not it is determined based on (whether or not), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree suggestion image is a button effect performed immediately before the game state suggestion effect, and whether or not the player operates the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction (the operation instruction of the player's effect button 63 operation). Achievement degree. Hereinafter, it may be determined by "button operation achievement degree"). Alternatively, the expectation degree suggestion image may be determined in consideration of the type of the internal jackpot and the degree of achievement of the player's button operation in the button effect. In this way, the player can perform the technical intervention by the player himself and display the expectation suggestion image having a higher expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player selects either the selected character CRA or CRB in the character selection effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character selection effect, a character may be selected from three or more characters. Further, when a character is selected in the character selection effect, a predetermined line may be displayed or uttered, and the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the type of the displayed or uttered line.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are displayed in the selected image display effect, but the number and display positions of the selected images are particularly limited. It is not a thing and may be arbitrary. Further, as shown in FIG. 108, in the button effect, five button image BOGs are displayed, but the number of button image BOGs is not particularly limited and may be arbitrary.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the time saving game is started when the jackpot game is completed, and when the special symbol is changed 100 times (time saving number of times) in this time saving game, the time saving game is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times or 50 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) of whether or not to increase the number of time reductions by a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) is performed. Good. Alternatively, when the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) may be performed as to whether or not the number of time reductions will be continued until the next big hit. Furthermore, when the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) may be performed to indicate whether or not the probability change is confirmed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E1-1]
Display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
When the symbol displayed variable by the symbol display means is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game and the jackpot game executing means.
A time-saving game changing means for changing the game state after the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time-saving game, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The time-saving game has a low probability time reduction in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is a normal first probability and a high probability time reduction in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability.
When the time-saving game is completed, in the low-accuracy time-saving, the gaming state becomes a low-accuracy low-based normal state, and in the high-accuracy time-saving, the gaming state has a latent probability change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state. It becomes a high probability low base latent probability change state,
The display means can execute the first effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The first effect display performs a game state suggestion effect that suggests whether the current game state is a normal state or a latent probability change state when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the time saving game is completed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-2]
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the symbol display means performs the variable display of the symbol a predetermined number of times.
The display means can execute the second effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
In the second effect display, a countdown display is performed for each change of the symbol from the end of the time saving game until the variation display of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1.
[Aspect E1-3]
The display means can execute the third effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The third effect display is an effect display that displays a specific image that changes according to the effect mode.
The game state suggestion effect suggests whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state by changing the display mode of the specific image depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state. ,
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-1 or the aspect E1-2.
[Aspect E1-4]
The display means can execute the fourth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed during execution of the jackpot game by the jackpot game executing means, and displays a plurality of selected images suggesting a game state after the jackpot game, and displays the plurality of selected images of the plurality of selected images. The selected image selected from the inside suggests the degree of expectation of the game state after the big hit game.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3.
[Aspect E1-5]
Equipped with a production button that can be operated by the player
The display means can execute the fifth effect display as one of the plurality of effect displays.
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed during execution of the jackpot game by the jackpot game execution means, and displays a plurality of characters that can be selected by the player, and a character selected from the plurality of characters. The operation of the effect button is different according to the button effect, and after the end of the button effect, the game state after the big hit game is suggested.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4.

The meter effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. This meter effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the meter effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. It is an effect to display an image.

[Meter production A]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but is not when advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the meter effect A, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The meter image MT and the fluctuation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Even at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event in which the victory or defeat is decided, there is a production in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (event result) in a duel. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

In the battle production, first, as the first stage production, an enemy character determination production for identifying the opponent of the ally character CRA is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the still image TK of the enemy character as an opponent and the still image MK of the ally character are displayed side by side. The meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the previous stage effect. Here, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented by "Battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), as a continuation of the previous stage effect, when the ally character CRA is independently displayed, the meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA is prepared to be in the position before the duel, the meter image MT moves to the right from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player feels nervous. Can be given. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the battle effect. In addition, it moves from the first position to the second position during the battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the friendly character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Winning or losing is suggested by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), a button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration date image showing the expiration date of the button operation, and A continuous hit suggestion image showing "Continuous hit !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, the meter image MT is switched to the full tank image MXG representing “MAX !!!” as shown in FIG. 109 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Meter production B]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but is not when advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 110A, in the meter effect B, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The meter image MT and the fluctuation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Even at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event in which the victory or defeat is decided, there is a production in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (event result) in a duel. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as the first stage effect, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. That is, each of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and the button image BTN and the operation suggestion image SSE represented by "press !!!!" are displayed. .. At this time, at the same time, an enemy character determination effect for identifying the opponent of the ally character CRA may be executed. Specifically, four enemy character images may be displayed corresponding to each of the four transparent members, and one enemy character image may be displayed on one transparent member. As a result, each enemy character image appears to be displayed on the four transparent members when viewed from the player. The background color of the four enemy characters changes in order by the roulette method, the roulette is stopped by the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and one enemy character may be selected. After that, the evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move from the state of covering the display screen 7a toward the retracted positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the previous stage effect. Here, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented by "Battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), as a continuation of the previous stage effect, when the ally character CRA is independently displayed, the meter image movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA is prepared to be in the position before the duel, the meter image MT moves to the right from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player feels nervous. Can be given. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the battle effect. In addition, it moves from the first position to the second position during the battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the friendly character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Winning or losing is suggested by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), the button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63 and the operation expiration date image TBI showing the expiration date of the button operation. , The continuous hit suggestion image RND represented by "Continuous hit !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, the meter image MT is switched to the full tank image MXG representing “MAX !!!” as shown in FIG. 110 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated production with a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Meter production C]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but is not when advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111A, in the meter effect C, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The meter image MT and the fluctuation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the meter image MT moves from the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the right and is displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event in which the victory or defeat is decided, there is a production in which a plurality of characters duel as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (event result) in a duel. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

In the battle effect, first, as the first stage effect, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the advance effect of the second movable accessory 15 is executed. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 makes it difficult to see at least a part of the meter image MT. Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the previous stage effect. Here, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented by "Battle start !!!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the second position in the center of the display screen 7a, and is partially overlapped with the start suggestion image BKS.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), as a continuation of the previous stage effect, when the ally character CRA is displayed independently, the meter image re-movement effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA is prepared to be in the position before the duel, the meter image MT moves to the left from the second position and stops at a predetermined position (third position). In this way, when the battle finally begins, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the left, which makes the player nervous. Can give a feeling. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the battle effect. In addition, it moves from the second position to the third position during the battle production. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the friendly character CRA beats the enemy character CRB. Winning or losing is suggested by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the button image BTN representing the shape of the effect button 63 and the operation expiration date image TBI representing the expiration date of the button operation. , The continuous hit suggestion image RND represented by "continuous hits !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, the meter image MT is switched to the full tank image MXG representing “MAX !!!” as shown in FIG. 111 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated production with a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Meter production D]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect D. The meter effect D represents the subsequent effect when the battle is lost in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. Similar to the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, although the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position, the illustration is omitted. In the first movable accessory 14, four transparent members are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted.

112 (A) corresponds to FIGS. 109 (F), 110 (F), and 111 (F) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. That is, the meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA is executed. The meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the friendly character CRA beats the enemy character CRB, so the meter is fully filled. The success or failure of the game suggests victory or defeat. Here, the meter is not fully filled in a predetermined period, and then, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a defeat effect in which the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At this time, the losing ally character CRA is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the meter image MT is redisplayed in a state in which the decorative symbol is continuously stopped and displayed in a lost manner. At this time, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. When a reach is formed in the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 112 (F), then, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the decorative symbol disappearance effect is executed in which the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image movement effect is also performed. Specifically, when the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a, the meter image MT moves to the right from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). In this way, when the special reach effect is finally started, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The timing at which the meter image MT moves may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a, or may be different. The meter image MT may be moved before the disappearance of the decorative symbol, or may be moved after the disappearance of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 112 (H) below, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a pre-stage effect of the battle effect. This battle start suggestion effect corresponds to FIGS. 109 (D), 110 (D), and 111 (D) in the meter effects A to C of FIGS. 109 to 111. However, the difference is that the meter image MT has already moved to the second position. After that, the pre-stage effect of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 109 (E), 110 (E), and 111 (E), and the in-battle effect shown in FIGS. 109 (F), 110 (F), and 111 (F). Is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), the meter is fully filled, and the victory effect in which the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (A) and 109 (B), the first effect in which the meter image MT is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and the first effect after the first effect are shown. As shown in 109 (D) to (G), it is possible to execute the second effect in which the battle effect is executed while the meter image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (D) to (G) and 111 (A) to (B), the meter image MT is at least one of the first effect and the second effect. They are displayed at different positions in the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the first effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 109 (E). In the second effect, the meter image MT moves from the first position to the second position on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (B) to 109 (C), the meter image MT is continuously displayed during the transition from the first effect to the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the battle effect includes an effect in which the meter image MT is switched to another image (for example, a full tank image MXG). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 110, the game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the first movable accessory 14, and when the first effect is shifted to the second effect, at least a part of the meter image MT is provided. A fourth effect covered by the transparent portion of the first movable accessory 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the meter effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The meter image MT shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 is an example thereof, and the configuration of the meter image MT is not limited to the above. For example, the meter image MT may have a circular shape like a car meter, or may be an image that digitally displays numbers. Further, a plurality of meter image MTs may be displayed. For example, it may be configured to represent the remaining energy of each of the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Further, the meter image MT may be arranged at a position other than the above-mentioned position, or may move in a direction other than the above-mentioned direction.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the meter effects of FIGS. 109 to 112 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the meter effect A of FIG. 109, during the effect of FIGS. 109 (C) and 109 (I), the first movable accessory 14 may cover the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (C). ..
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 109 to 112, it has been described that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself that determines the victory or defeat, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. However, the battle production represents the event itself that determines the outcome, and may be interpreted as not including the pre-stage production and the post-stage production before and after the event itself.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image used at the time of battle production.
The first effect in which the meter image is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and
A gaming machine characterized in that after the first effect, a second effect in which the battle effect is executed while the meter image is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the meter image is displayed at different positions from each other in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-2.
In the first effect, the meter image is displayed at the first position of the display means.
In the second effect, the meter image is a gaming machine characterized in that the meter image moves from the first position to the second position of the display means.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the meter image is continuously displayed during the transition from the first effect to the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4.
The game machine is characterized in that the battle effect includes an effect of switching the meter image to another image.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5 is further described.
Equipped with movable accessories
A gaming machine characterized in that when transitioning from the first effect to the second effect, a fourth effect in which at least a part of the meter image is covered with the movable accessory can be executed.

The related image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. This related image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the related image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Related image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect A. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is described as a production in the highly accurate time-saving game "OARO Rush" that is started after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is aiming for a special 2 prize by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 113 (A), in the related image display effect A, after the jackpot game is completed, the display screen 7a shows the high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS showing "OARO rush start !!" and the right-handed suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 113 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening game (OARO rush) starting from now on. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fantasy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. Here, the plurality of character images represent different objects (people). On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and a currently selected and selected character are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select a character !!", and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, the character image farther from the selected character image is displayed so that the size becomes smaller. That is, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the adjacent character images on the outside thereof are displayed so as to be the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D) show that the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the player's effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and is partially covered with the button image BTN. In other words, the button image BTN is displayed so as to overlap the selection promotion image SES.

When one character is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adopted decision screen shown in FIG. 113 (E) is displayed. On the adoption decision screen, a decision notification image KHG that notifies that the selection of one character is completed, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected character is displayed are displayed. Will be done. On the adoption decision screen, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select a character !!" and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the characters of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES represented by "select a character !!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that the selection of the character is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Select a character !!" is displayed after selecting a character, it is possible to more easily visually determine that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed in an superimposed manner on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give an impression of being visually complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, "Sunglasses Man") is displayed after the selection, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the character has been selected.

After selecting the character, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed so as to overlap the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time as well, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect that a plurality of characters confront each other as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in a confrontation. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character confront each other is displayed.

In the battle production, first, as the first stage production, an opponent determination production for identifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, the battle start suggestion image BKS showing "Battle start !!!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full. Success or failure suggests victory or defeat.

As shown in FIG. 113 (I), when the meter is fully filled, the effect that the selected character wins is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Related image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect B.
A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is described as a production in the high-accuracy time-saving game "Alphabet Rush" that is started after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is aiming for a special 2 prize by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 114 (A), in the related image display effect B, after the jackpot game is completed, the display screen 7a shows the high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS showing "Alphabet rush start !!" and the right-handed suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for a player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed during a high-accuracy time-shortening game (alphabet rush) starting from now on. Here, the uppercase alphabet is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fantasy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images (alphabet images) are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and a currently selected and selected character An enlarged image KUD in which (alphabet) is enlarged, a selection promotion image SES in which "Select an alphabet!" Is displayed, and a right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four alphabet images) that are candidates for selectable characters (alphabets) are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, an arrow is displayed above the character image in the currently selected state (selected). According to the operation of the select button 68 by the player, the arrow moves and the selected character image is switched. In FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (D), when the "right" button of the select button 68 is pressed twice, the character image (alphabet) selected by the arrow is sequentially switched to the right image. It is shown.

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image (alphabet) in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (D) show that the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the player's effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected alphabet. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and is partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character (alphabet) is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters (alphabets) by operating the effect button 63, the hiring decision screen shown in FIG. 114 (E) is displayed. On the hiring decision screen, a decision notification image KHG for notifying that one alphabet has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected alphabet is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected alphabet is displayed are displayed. To. On the adoption decision screen, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select an alphabet!" And the right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the characters of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES represented by "select the alphabet!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that the selection of the character (alphabet) is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Select the alphabet!" Is displayed after selecting the alphabet, it is possible to more easily visually determine that the character (alphabet) has been selected. Further, since the selected character (alphabet) is displayed in an superimposed manner on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give an impression of being visually complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After selecting the character, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the background image HKG of the selected character (alphabet) and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed so as to overlap the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the variable display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Even at this time, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, a roulette effect in which one character is selected from a plurality of characters (alphabets) as in this embodiment can be raised. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not it is a big hit depending on whether or not a specific alphabet (for example, the selected alphabet) is selected by the roulette (event result). Other events that determine the outcome include winning and losing of fighting and competition, success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), and winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event (roulette) itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), as a battle effect, a roulette effect in which one is selected from a plurality of selected alphabets is displayed.

In the battle effect shown in FIG. 114 (H), first, as the first stage effect, the battle start suggestion image BKS represented by "Roulette start!" Is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the roulette image RG is displayed. To. The roulette represented by the roulette image RG starts rotating after being displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), an arrow is pierced into the roulette wheel that is open. Whether or not this arrow sticks to the selected character (alphabet) suggests whether or not it is a big hit. When the arrow sticks to the selected character (alphabet) as shown in FIG. 114 (H), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode as shown in FIG. 114 (J).

[Related image display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect C. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but the illustration is omitted. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. The first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but the illustration is omitted. Here, it is described as a production in the highly accurate time-saving game "OARO Rush" that is started after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is aiming for a special 2 prize by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the related image display effect A, after the jackpot game is completed, the display screen 7a shows the high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS showing "OARO rush start !!" and the right-handed suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening game (OARO rush) starting from now on. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fantasy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and a currently selected and selected character are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select a character !!", and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed larger than the other character images. Further, the character image farther from the selected character image is displayed so that the size becomes smaller. That is, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the adjacent character images on the outside thereof are displayed so as to be the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the "right" button of the select button 68 twice. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. In FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D), the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the player's effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and is partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the adopted decision screen shown in FIG. 115 (E) is displayed. On the adoption decision screen, a decision notification image KHG for notifying that one character has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG showing those related to the selected character are displayed. Is displayed. Here, the background image HKG represents a part (sunglasses) of the selected character. The background image HKG does not have to be a part or all of the selected character as long as it is related to the selected character. On the adoption decision screen, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select a character !!" and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the characters of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES represented by "select a character !!". As a result, the player can easily visually determine that the selection of the character is completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Select a character !!" is displayed after selecting a character, it is possible to more easily visually determine that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed in an superimposed manner on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give an impression of being visually complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, since the name of the selected character (here, "Sunglasses Man") is displayed after the selection, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the character has been selected.

After selecting the character, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a. During this variation effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if something related to the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed so as to overlap the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates to the player what the selected character is. Here, the name of the selected character is shown. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time as well, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect that a plurality of characters confront each other as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in a confrontation. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character confront each other is displayed.

In the battle production, first, as the first stage production, an opponent determination production for identifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, the battle start suggestion image BKS showing "Battle start !!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full. Success or failure suggests victory or defeat.

As shown in FIG. 115 (I), if the meter is not fully filled, the effect that the selected character is defeated is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (J), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Related image display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the related image display effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when explaining the state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible via the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first aspect). That is, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 are located at the four corners of the display screen 7a, respectively. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each of which has an image display area in which an image described later can be switched between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state. The second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position above the display screen 7a (first aspect), but is not when advanced to the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect). , Illustration is omitted. Here, it is described as a production in the highly accurate time-saving game "OARO Rush" that is started after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is aiming for a special 2 prize by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 116 (A), in the related image display effect D, after the jackpot game is completed, the display screen 7a shows the high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS showing "OARO rush start !!" and the right-handed suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. After that, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 116 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of the high-accuracy time-shortening game (OARO rush) starting from now on. Here, a human face image is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any object can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fantasy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and a currently selected and selected character are enlarged and displayed. The enlarged image KUD, the selection promotion image SES indicating "Select a character !!", and the right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are candidates for selectable characters are arranged in a horizontal row. Then, among the plurality of character images, the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is displayed so as to be located above the other character images. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. In FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C), the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. ..

The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the character image in the currently selected state (selected) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. In FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C), the characters represented by the enlarged image KUD are sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the player's effect button 63. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and is partially covered with the button image BTN.

When one character is selected (decided to be adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 116 (D) after the character is selected. Then, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this variation effect, the background image HKG of the selected character and the icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed so as to overlap the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates to the player what the selected character is. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (nine in this case) are vertically arranged, and is used at the time of battle production described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variation display can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), a reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time as well, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. The battle production is one of the special reach productions, and an event that determines the outcome is carried out, and by notifying the result of the event, whether the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner becomes a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. It is a suggestive production. As an event that determines the victory or defeat, there is an effect that a plurality of characters confront each other as in this embodiment. In this case, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (event result) in a confrontation. Other events that determine the outcome include the success or failure of specific missions (tree climbing, block stacking, etc.), the success or failure of roulette, and the winning or losing of playing cards or rock-paper-scissors. Here, it is assumed that the battle production includes not only the production representing the event itself, but also the pre-stage production and the post-stage production performed before and after the production. Here, as a battle effect, an effect in which the selected character and another character confront each other is displayed.

In the battle production, first, as the first stage production, an opponent determination production for identifying the opponent of the selected character is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the still image MK of the selected character and the still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. After that, the battle start suggestion image BKS showing "Battle start !!" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves to the right. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player can be given a sense of tension. This makes it possible to improve the interest. In this way, the meter image MT is displayed at different positions during the variation effect of the decorative pattern and the special reach effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, the player can be surprised and surprised. The meter image MT has multiple scales (9 in this case), and when all are filled (when all 9 colors change), the selected character wins the opponent, so the meter is full. Success or failure suggests victory or defeat. During the battle between the selected character and the opponent, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the button image BTN showing the shape of the effect button 63, the operation expiration date image TBI showing the expiration date of the button operation, and " A continuous hit suggestion image RND indicating "Continuous hit !!!" is displayed. After that, when the meter is fully filled, the meter image MT is switched to the full tank image MXG representing “MAX !!!” as shown in FIG. 116 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a, respectively. That is, the four transparent members move in a direction approaching each other. Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions of the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complicated production with a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the related image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D), a first effect in which a plurality of character images representing different objects are displayed, and a plurality of after the first effect. When one character image is selected from the character images of the above, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), a second effect in which the background image HKG and the icon image ICN related to the selected character image are displayed. Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), in the second effect, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN, which are related to the selected character image and have different contents, are displayed. Will be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the icon image ICN. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the background image HKG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D), in the first effect, it overlaps with the selection promotion image SES that prompts the selection of one character image from a plurality of character images. The button image BTN is displayed, and by operating the effect button 63, the selected character image among the plurality of character images is changed to be larger than the others. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when one character image is selected from a plurality of character images by the operation of the effect button 63, the selection is completed by overlapping with the selection promotion image SES. The decision notification image KHG suggesting that is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the related image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The plurality of character images shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 each showed a different face and a different alphabet. As described above, "a plurality of character images represent different objects" is not limited to representing different types of objects such as faces, cars, and characters, and may be of the same type. The same kind of thing, for example, even if it is the same kind of human face, if it is another person's face, it will be a different object, and even if it is the same person's face, it will have different facial expressions or different If it is an angle, it corresponds to a different object.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the related image display effects of FIGS. 113 to 116 may be appropriately combined, or a part of each content may not be provided.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a target image representing a predetermined target.
The first effect in which a plurality of the target images representing different targets are displayed, and
After the first effect, when one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images, the second effect of displaying the related image related to the selected target image can be executed. A featured game machine.
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that a plurality of the related images, which are related to the selected target image and have different contents from each other, are displayed.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the plurality of related images is an icon image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the plurality of related images is a background image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image showing the appearance of the operation means.
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed so as to overlap with the selection promotion image that prompts the selection of one target image from the plurality of predetermined images.
A gaming machine characterized in that a selected target image among the plurality of target images is changed by an operation of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-5.
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images by the operation of the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a selection completion image suggesting that selection has been completed is displayed on top of the selection promotion image.

The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. This battle effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the battle effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This battle effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). In addition, the battle effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (plural variation effects).

[Battle production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, the battle start suggestion display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first region AR1 and a second region AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The friendly character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a ally character determination effect (FIG. 117 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 117 (F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the ally character determination effect can be executed. This ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes the first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), the battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory production, a production is performed to show that the ally character CRA transforms and wins the enemy character CRB. After that, the jackpot symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot notification effect suggesting that the jackpot is achieved is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the enemy character determination effect can be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character to make the first strike is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-mentioned battle victory effect (FIG. 117 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (G). In this battle defeat production, a production indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the out-of-order symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the out-of-order notification effect suggesting that the out-of-order symbols are out of order is executed.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, the battle start suggestion display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first region AR1 and a second region AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The friendly character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves with the movement of the boundary line KL. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a ally character determination effect (FIG. 118 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 118 (F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the ally character determination effect can be executed. This ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes the first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory production, a production is performed to show that the ally character CRA transforms and wins the enemy character CRB. After that, the jackpot symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot notification effect suggesting that the jackpot is achieved is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the enemy character determination effect can be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character to make the first strike is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-mentioned battle victory effect (FIG. 118 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (G). In this battle defeat production, a production indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the out-of-order symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the out-of-order notification effect suggesting that the out-of-order symbols are out of order is executed.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, the battle start suggestion display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first region AR1 and a second region AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The friendly character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. Further, in this first character selection effect, the button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL, and more specifically, is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. Further, in the second character selection effect, the button image BTN is continuously displayed. In this case, in this case, the button image BTN is at the same position as the first character selection effect, and the button image BTN is not moving. The boundary line KL moves within a certain range of the button image BTN. Not limited to this, the boundary line KL may move outside a certain range of the button image BTN. Further, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

After the second character selection effect, a ally character determination effect (FIG. 119 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 119 (F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the ally character determination effect can be executed. This ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes the first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory production, a production is performed to show that the ally character CRA transforms and wins the enemy character CRB. After that, the jackpot symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot notification effect suggesting that the jackpot is achieved is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the enemy character determination effect can be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character to make the first strike is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-mentioned battle victory effect (FIG. 119 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (G). In this battle defeat production, a production indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the out-of-order symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the out-of-order notification effect suggesting that the out-of-order symbols are out of order is executed.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), the battle start suggestion effect is executed. In this battle start suggestion effect, the battle start suggestion display XF1 suggesting the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the time-saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the first character selection effect is executed. This first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first region AR1 and a second region AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. The friendly character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. The button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed on the front side of the boundary line KL. This button image BTN is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

Further, the meter image XF2 is displayed for the first character selection effect. The meter image XF2 is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a and represents the meter value. The meter value of the meter image XF2 is shown as a crosshatch in the figure. The meter value of this meter image XF2 suggests a jackpot expectation, and the meter value may increase as the area of the first region AR1 increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the second character selection effect is executed. This second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moved from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves with the movement of the boundary line KL. The friendly character CRA is continuously displayed in the first area AR1, and the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed in the second area AR2. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

Further, in the second character selection effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases as the area of the first region AR1 increases.

After the second character selection effect, a ally character determination effect (FIG. 120 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 120 (F)), which will be described later, is executed.

After the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the ally character determination effect can be executed. This ally character determination effect indicates that the character making the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes the first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB.

Further, in the ally character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, suggesting that the jackpot probability rises sharply, that is, the jackpot is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), the battle victory effect is executed. In this battle victory production, a production is performed to show that the ally character CRA transforms and wins the enemy character CRB. After that, the jackpot symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot notification effect suggesting that the jackpot is achieved is executed.

On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the enemy character determination effect can be executed. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character to make the first strike is determined to be the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes the first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all the areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and at the time of the first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

In the enemy character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 changes depending on the superiority or inferiority of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA becomes dominant, it rises and the ally character CRA is inferior. It does not rise when it becomes.

After the enemy character determination effect, the above-mentioned battle victory effect (FIG. 120 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect can be executed.

After the enemy character determination effect, the battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (G). In this battle defeat production, a production indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, the out-of-order symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the out-of-order notification effect suggesting that the out-of-order symbols are out of order is executed.

In this battle effect D, if the area of the first region AR1 increases, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases accordingly, but if the area of the first region AR1 decreases, the meter image XF2 increases accordingly. The meter value of may be lowered. That is, the meter value of the meter image XF2 may be made to correspond to the enlargement / reduction of the area of the first region AR1.

In the above battle effects A to D, other effects (such as other battle effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
Further, in the battle effects A to D, the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect may be repeated.
In the battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation is changed according to the size of the area of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2. That is, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first region AR1 is larger than the area of the second region AR2, it is a big hit as compared with the case where the area of the first region AR1 is smaller than the area of the second region AR2. It has a high expectation. That is, the jackpot expectation is suggested based on the area of the first region AR1 (second region AR2).
Further, in the battle effects A to D, the first area AR1 may be easily expanded or difficult to be expanded depending on the type of the character appearing in the first area AR1 or the second area AR2, in other words, the first area AR1. The jackpot expectation may change depending on the type of character appearing in the area AR1 or the second area AR2.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the battle effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, and then the first area AR1 and the second area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed. An effect of changing the area of the area AR2 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first region AR1 and the second region AR2, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on the area of the first region AR1 (second region AR2). According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation changes depending on the change of the first region AR1 and the second region AR2, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above battle effects A to D, the character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and also to execute a moving effect by the movement of the character, which improves the interest of the game. Can be done.

[Effect 4]
In the above battle effect D, the meter image XF2 is displayed at the time of the effect of changing the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first region AR1 and the second region AR2, and also to execute a moving effect by the meter value of the meter image XF2, which makes the game more interesting. Can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above battle effect D, in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, the size of the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) is reflected in the meter value of the meter image XF2. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the size of the first region AR1, the jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the meter value of the meter image XF2, so that the player can be given an exciting feeling and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

[Effect 6]
In the above battle effect D, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2 in the character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the area of the first area AR1 becomes the first. When it is smaller than the area of the two-region AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is smaller than MAX. According to this configuration, if the area of the first region AR1 is larger than that of the second region AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the jackpot expectation increases, so that the player can see the first region AR1. It is possible to pay attention to the movement, give the player a great sense of excitement, and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the battle effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the game machine of the above embodiment, after the second character selection effect, the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are further increased or decreased, so that the first area AR1 And the size of the second area AR2 may fluctuate. Further, after that, the character determination effect may be performed by making the areas of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 about the same.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area.
The second display effect is an effect of changing the areas of the first display area and the second display area, respectively.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-1.
In the combination effect, the jackpot expectation is suggested based on the area of the first display area in the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-2.
In the first display area, the character is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing meter display.
The combination effect may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-4.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the size of the area of the first display area of the second display effect is reflected in the meter value of the meter display.

[Aspect XF-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-5.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is larger than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display Is the first value, and when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is smaller than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is set to the first value. A second value smaller than,
A game machine characterized by that.

The cracking effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. This cracking effect can be performed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the crack effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This cracking effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol (one variation effect). It should be noted that the cracking effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (plural variation effect).

[Cracking effect A]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the cracking effect A.
In the cracking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the right-handed suggestion display XG3, and the hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, is a display that suggests that the player is in the rush (during continuous chan). The acquired ball output display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during consecutive chans). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requires (recommends) the player to hit right. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the right-handed suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating how the screen of the display screen 7a is cracked is displayed. A part of the screen crack display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as cracked (as if it were missing). (Displayed as missing). On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not appear to be cracked (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and other displays (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 121 (C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 121 (D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super hot", which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high.
After this boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Cracking effect B]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the cracking effect B.
In the cracking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the right-handed suggestion display XG3, and the hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, is a display that suggests that the player is in the rush (during continuous chan). The acquired ball output display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during consecutive chans). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requires (recommends) the player to hit right. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the right-handed suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating how the screen of the display screen 7a is cracked is displayed. A part of the screen crack display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as cracked (as if it were missing). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not appear to be cracked (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and other displays (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 122 (C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 122 (D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super hot", which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), the missing character appearance effect is executed. In this missing character appearance effect, the character XG6 is displayed in the screen crack display GW.
Further, in the missing character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move the boundary portion between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After this boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Cracking effect C]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the cracking effect C.
In the cracking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the right-handed suggestion display XG3, and the hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, is a display that suggests that the player is in the rush (during continuous chan). The acquired ball output display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during consecutive chans). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requires (recommends) the player to hit right. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the right-handed suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating how the screen of the display screen 7a is cracked is displayed. A part of the screen crack display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as cracked (as if it were missing). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not appear to be cracked (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123C, the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and other displays (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 123C, this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 123 (D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super hot", which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the missing character appearance effect is executed. In this missing character appearance effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen crack display GW. This character image XG7 represents the characters "Hit !?", suggesting that it may be a big hit.
Further, in the missing character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move the boundary portion between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After this boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Cracking effect D]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the cracking effect D.
In the cracking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, in this timer display number suggestion effect, the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the right-handed suggestion display XG3, and the hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, is a display that suggests that the player is in the rush (during continuous chan). The acquired ball output display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during consecutive chans). The right-handed suggestion display XG3 is a display that requires (recommends) the player to hit right. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the right-handed suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the screen cracking effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating how the screen of the display screen 7a is cracked is displayed. A part of the screen crack display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C. Therefore, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the part reached by the screen crack display GW is displayed as cracked (as if it were missing). .. On the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display XG3 is displayed on the front side of the screen crack display GW, and does not appear to be cracked (as if there is a missing portion).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and other displays (hereinafter, also referred to as non-screen crack display) on the display screen 7a. In the example of FIG. 124 (C), this boundary portion is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display on the display screen 7a. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary portion different from that of the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 124 (D), this boundary portion is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents the character "super hot", which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the effect effect is executed. In this effect effect, the effect image XG8 is displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display. The effect image XG8 is fluidly moving at the boundary. The effect image XG8 may be continuously arranged around the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display, or may be a portion around the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display. It may be arranged as a target.
Further, in this effect effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen crack display GW. This character image XG7 represents the characters "Hit !?", suggesting that it may be a big hit. Further, in the missing character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move the boundary portion between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display.
After this boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

In the cracking effects A to D, other effects (such as other cracking effects) may be incorporated into one effect.
Further, in the cracking effects A to D, in addition to the rush suggestion display XG1 and the acquired ball output display XG2, a predetermined image (for example, a chance image or a character) is cracked (as if it was missing) by the screen cracking display GW. ) May be displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the cracking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the cracking effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after displaying various images on the display screen 7a in the decorative symbol variation effect, the screen cracking effect in which the screen cracking display GW is displayed is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a part of the image such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C is missing and displayed by the screen cracking display GW. According to this configuration, the defect display makes the image display have a different taste than usual, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the screen cracking effect, a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is missing and displayed by the screen cracking display GW. .. According to this configuration, the missing display of the image including characters makes the image display have a different taste from usual, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the cracking effects A to D, the screen cracking effect includes a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball output display XG2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the non-screen cracking display characters. A part other than the image is displayed as a defect by the screen crack display GW. According to this configuration, the image display having a different taste from the usual one due to the missing display of the part other than the image including the characters and the image including the characters of the non-screen crack display can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the cracking effects A to D, the character image XG5 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen cracking display GW and the non-screen cracking display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character image is displayed at the boundary portion while being displayed as a defect, so that various displays are displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the cracking effects A to D, the character XG4 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen cracking display GW and the non-screen cracking display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character is displayed at the boundary portion while being displayed as a defect, so that various displays are displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the cracking effects B to D, the character XG6 is newly displayed in the screen cracking display GW in the defective character appearance effect. According to this configuration, since the character XG6 is displayed in the screen crack display GW, various displays can be made while displaying the missing characters, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the cracking effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the cracking effects A to D, the boundary character appearance effect is executed after the boundary character appearance effect, but the boundary character appearance effect may be executed after the boundary character appearance effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the front side of the screen cracking display GW, but is not limited to this, and is displayed on the back side of the screen cracking display GW, and the character XG4 is displayed. A part of the screen may be displayed so as to be hidden behind the screen crack display GW.

[Modification 3]
In the above cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed on the front side of the screen cracking display GW, but is not limited to this, and is displayed on the back side of the screen cracking display GW and the characters are displayed. A part of the image XG5 may be displayed so as to be hidden by the screen crack display GW.

[Modification example 4]
The cracking effects A to D have been executed in a probabilistic state (during rush (during continuous chan)) that is advantageous to the player, but the game state is not limited to the normal game state and the probabilistic state. May be executed. In this case, the screen crack display GW lacks a predetermined image.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined display area.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a defect display in which a part of the predetermined display area is displayed as if it is missing.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-1.
The predetermined display area has a character area including characters, and the predetermined display area has a character area.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a part of the character area of the predetermined display area is missing and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a part of the character area of the predetermined display area and a part other than the character area of the predetermined display area are missing and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-3.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, at the first boundary portion between the missing display area of the predetermined display area and the non-defective display area of the predetermined display area. A production that makes new characters appear,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-5]
A game machine according to the aspect XG-4.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a new character appears at the second boundary between the defective display area and the non-defective display area of the predetermined display area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect XG-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-5.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect of newly appearing a character in the missing display area of the predetermined display area is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The meter button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128. This meter button effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol that synchronizes with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), for example. It is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, this meter button effect displays the button image while the meter image is displayed, raises the meter value of the meter image in relation to the operation of the player's effect button, and expects a big hit depending on the degree of increase. It is a production that suggests the degree.

[Meter button production A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect A.
In the meter button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 125 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 125 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, during the execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A provided with a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 125 (D) described later), and the meter area EM3A is in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. It represents the meter value by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 125 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. In this button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in connection with the operation of the player's effect button 63. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 125 (C), the display screen 7a displays the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surrounding area. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH creates an afterimage like a fireball. It moves in all directions while leaving, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, so that the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, it suggests whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a big hit or a reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 2/3. Further, a meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestion effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), and it is shown that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. That is, in this jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. In the jackpot suggestion effect, the character MGL indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full (suggesting a jackpot) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, the player can be made to feel a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the fluctuation) shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

On the other hand, instead of the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (E), the loss suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (G) may be executed. In this loss suggestion effect, in the meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), as a result of the player operating the effect button 63, the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full as shown in FIG. 125 (G). It is done at the time. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) becomes a loss (reach loss) because the meter value is not full. In the loss suggestion effect, the character MLL indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (suggesting loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL of LOSE, it is possible to make the player feel that it will not be a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 125 (A) is lost (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 125 (B). .. In this example, "757" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

[Meter button production B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect B.
In the meter button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 126 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 126 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, this reach symbol array "8 ↓ 8" is a symbol array that usually becomes a jackpot when it becomes a jackpot symbol array "888", and in the normal jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends The game state becomes a low-accuracy time-shortening state (low-accuracy high-base state) until it is played 100 times, and thereafter it becomes a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state).
In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, during the execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A provided with a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 126 (D) described later), and the meter area EM3A is in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is expressed by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 126 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. In this button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in connection with the operation of the effect button 63 of the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 126 (C), the display screen 7a shows the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surrounding area. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH creates an afterimage like a fireball. It moves in all directions while leaving, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, so that the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, it suggests whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) is a big hit or a reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 2/3. Further, the meter value (hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (D) is displayed in blue, for example.
Further, a meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is the meter effect shown in FIG. 126 (D), and it is shown that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. That is, in this probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. Here, the color of the meter value (cross-hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (E) is given a higher expectation than blue (a privilege more advantageous than blue) from the blue shown in FIG. 126 (D). (Probability is high) For example, it changes to red and is displayed. That is, in this probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, the color of the meter value has changed from blue to red, so that the reach symbol array “8 ↓ 8” that normally becomes a jackpot in the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) is shown. Despite this, it suggests that the result will be a probable jackpot. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that becomes a highly accurate time-saving state (high accuracy high base state) until the next jackpot in the game state after the jackpot game ends. That is, in this probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the probabilistic jackpot is achieved by the fact that the meter value is full and the color of the meter value is changed from blue to red. In the probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, the character MGL indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full (suggesting a jackpot) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, the player can be made to feel a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the variation) shown in FIG. 126 (B) is temporarily stopped with the normal jackpot symbol. That is, in this normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol arrangement is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R swing slightly (2, 3 frames) up and down. It is in a temporary stop state. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), the full rotation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this full rotation effect, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array that was temporarily stopped in the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 126 (F) is in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are synchronized. , As shown by the arrow YA, the player scrolls downward so as to be visible at a low speed. Therefore, in this full rotation effect, only the jackpot symbol arrangement is sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect, as a result of the full rotation effect shown in FIG. 126 (G), it is shown that "777" as the probabilistic jackpot symbol array has stopped and hit the jackpot. That is, the normal jackpot symbol that has been stopped once is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot symbol by the full rotation effect. In addition, the characters "Probability change jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the probabilistic jackpot.

[Meter button production C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect C.
In the meter button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 127 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 127 (A). In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, during the execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A provided with a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (a hatched portion shown in FIG. 127 (D) described later), and the meter area EM3A is inside the meter frame EM2A for each memory. It represents the meter value by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 127 (B), and the button image BOG is displayed. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. In this button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in connection with the operation of the player's effect button 63. Specifically, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 127 (C), the display screen 7a shows the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG. A moving display object IH is generated from the surrounding area. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH creates an afterimage like a fireball. It moves in all directions while leaving, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, so that the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, it suggests whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) is a big hit or a reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 2/3. Further, a meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the loss suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this loss suggestion effect, in the meter effect shown in FIG. 127 (D), as a result of the player operating the effect button 63, the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full as shown in FIG. 127 (E). It is done at the time. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 3/4. That is, in this loss suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) becomes a loss (reach loss) because the meter value is not full. In the loss suggestion effect, the character MLL indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (suggesting loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL of LOSE, it is possible to make the player feel that it will not be a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the loss symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This temporary stop effect of the lost symbol indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 127 (A) is temporarily stopped at the lost symbol after reaching the reach in FIG. 127 (B). ing. That is, in this temporary stop effect of the lost symbol, the lost symbol array "757" is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R swing slightly up and down (2 or 3 frames). It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), the revival character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this revival accessory production, the second movable accessory 15 (2nd movable accessory 15) located in the home position with the loss symbol array "757" temporarily stopped in the loss symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 127 (F). (See FIG. 1) advances to the central advance position on the display screen 7a. In the state where the second movable accessory 15 has advanced to the central advance position, the second movable accessory 15 has a part of "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R and the decorative symbol 8C in the lost symbol arrangement "757". It covers all of "5" invisible. However, the "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R is partially covered in a readable manner so that the player can know that the "7" is from the uncovered portion. With this resurrection character production, the player predicts that he will be resurrected from a loss to a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the resurrection character production shown in FIG. 127 (G), when the second movable character 15 evacuated from the central advance position to the home position, this jackpot confirmation effect was temporarily stopped in the lost symbol arrangement "757". It is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" and have stopped. In other words, the lost symbol that has stopped once changes to a jackpot symbol due to the revival character production. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

[Meter button production D]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the meter button effect D.
In the meter button effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), a time saving (electric support) start effect performed when the jackpot game is completed is executed. In this time saving start effect, the characters "time saving start!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the characters "time saving start!", The player is urged to hit right. Right-handed arrow YAR is displayed. The character "right-handed" is displayed in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. The player wins a game ball at the second starting port 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win a prize by hitting right when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR. Can be made to. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 21, the display screen 7a executes the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 21 in a short time state, and variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it was done. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol is in the right symbol display area. 8R is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 128 (B) shows that the decorative symbol 8CR is changing (scrolling downward).
Further, during the execution of this reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A provided with a plurality of memories and a meter area EM3A (hatched portion shown in FIG. 128 (D) described later), and the meter area EM3A is in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. It represents the meter value by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128C, a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B) is switched, and an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Here, in this battle production, it is shown that the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. That is, in this battle production, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike is suggested. Therefore, in this battle production, it is suggested that the ally character CRA wins the battle. Further, in the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, it suggests whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a big hit or a reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 2/3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), the ally character CRA wins and the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full. It is shown that That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the meter value becomes full. Then, in this jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. In the center of the display screen 7a, the characters "victory!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has won are displayed together with the ally character CRA. By displaying the characters "Victory!" And when the meter value is full, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a big hit (a privilege that is advantageous to the player will be given).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the fluctuation) shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a jackpot. Here, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

On the other hand, instead of the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) may be executed. In this battle effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B) is switched, and an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. Here, in this battle production, it is shown that the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. That is, in this battle production, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike is suggested. Therefore, in this battle production, it is suggested that the enemy character CRB wins the battle. Further, in the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, that is, it suggests whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a big hit or a reach loss. In this example, it is shown that the meter value has increased by about 1/3. That is, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F), it can be known from the degree of increase in the meter value that the enemy character CRB is superior in the battle effect to the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle as shown in FIG. 128 (F), and the button image BOG. Is displayed. This button operation instruction effect is an effect performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike, as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F). Therefore, when the ally character CRA makes a first strike as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), as described above, after the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), FIG. 128 (D) ) Shows the jackpot suggestion effect. Specifically, in this button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Continuous hit!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. In this button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), the meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in connection with the operation of the player's effect button 63. It should be noted that this meter effect is also an effect performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike. Specifically, in this meter effect, when the player starts the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 128 (G), on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or The moving display object IH is generated from the periphery of the button image BOG. This moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, every time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH creates an afterimage like a fireball. It moves in all directions while leaving, and some (or all) of the finally generated moving display IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) rises when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, so that the meter value increases. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased from about 1/3 shown in FIG. 128 (G) to about 2/3. Further, a meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full. Then, when the meter effect is completed, the same effect as those shown in FIGS. 125 (E) to 125 (H) described above is performed, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter button effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the button image is displayed during the display of the meter image, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in relation to the operation of the effect button of the player. It is configured to suggest a jackpot expectation by the degree of increase in the meter value. (For example, if the meter value rises to the full tank, it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed (the higher the meter value, the easier it is for the player to be given a privilege)). According to this configuration, the player can skillfully operate the effect button as instructed to perform technical intervention in order to raise the meter value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in connection with the operation of the effect button of the player, and the meter image is displayed. The meter value is configured to increase as the moving display reaches the display area of the meter image. According to this configuration, the meter value rises when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image, so that the player is delighted with whether or not the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. Become. It is also possible to produce a highly visually effective effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the moving display object is configured to be generated every time the player operates the effect button. According to this configuration, the player can perform technical intervention by operating (continuously hitting) more effect buttons in order to generate more moving display objects and raise the meter value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, a battle effect is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character on the player side play against each other while the meter image is displayed, and when the ally character wins, a button is displayed. It is configured to fill the meter value of the meter image without displaying the image and suggest that the jackpot is confirmed. According to this configuration, the player is delighted with the movement of the ally character in the battle production, and pays great attention to the battle production with great interest in whether or not the ally character wins. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the display mode (color) of the meter value is changed, the result is that the reach symbol arrangement that is usually a big hit is shown. Is configured to suggest that is a probabilistic jackpot. According to this configuration, the player gazes at the meter image with great interest in whether or not the display mode (color) of the meter value changes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, when a predetermined accessory advances so as to invisiblely cover a part of the lost symbol array in a state where the lost symbol array is displayed. , The displayed lost symbol array is configured to change to a jackpot symbol array when the accessory is retracted from the advance position, that is, when the symbol array is completely visible. According to this configuration, the player pays great attention to whether or not the accessory is movable while the lost symbol arrangement is displayed. In particular, when the lost symbol array is a reach lost symbol array and the accessory covers a part of the reach lost symbol array invisiblely, if the same symbol forming the reach is covered in a readable manner, the game It is possible to make a person feel even stronger that it will be a big hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the meter button effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it has been described that the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the reach effect. It may be at the same time as the establishment of, or before or after the establishment of reach. Further, at the time of reach, the reach is not displayed by the decorative pattern, but this may be displayed small at both corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it is suggested that a big hit occurs when the meter value is full, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, even if the meter value does not fill up, or if the meter value exceeds a predetermined value, it may be suggested that a big hit will occur.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, it is suggested that when the color of the meter value changes, it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, not limited to the color, when the display mode such as the shape and size of the meter value changes, it may be suggested that the probability variation jackpot occurs. In addition, it may suggest other benefits, not limited to the probabilistic jackpot. Further, the image (for example, MAX) of characters or the like displayed together with the meter image when the color of the meter value changes may be changed to the same color as the meter value. Furthermore, the timing at which the color of the meter value changes is arbitrary, for example, it may be changed while the meter value is rising, or when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button becomes less than a predetermined time. It may be changed, it may be changed when the meter value rises by a predetermined value or more, or it may be changed when the meter value is full.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, after temporarily stopping with the lost symbol, the lost symbol is changed (revived) to the jackpot symbol by moving the accessory, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol, it may be changed (revived) to a jackpot symbol by re-variating (pseudo-ream). Alternatively, after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol, when a predetermined image such as a cut-in is displayed, the symbol may be changed (revived) to a jackpot symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the battle production, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character who has performed a predetermined technique may win the battle, or the character who has performed the technique in succession may win the battle. Alternatively, the character who defends the technique and counterattacks may win the battle. That is, the character who wins the battle may be a character who has performed a predetermined mode.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, in the button operation instruction effect, the player is made to repeatedly press the effect button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the instruction content of the button operation may be determined in association with the type of the ally character appearing in the battle effect (for example, if the ally character is A, a continuous hit, if B, a long press, etc.). Further, the player may be made to perform a plurality of types of button operations. For example, a plurality of types of button operation instructions such as repeated hits, long presses, and blows may be given in one button operation instruction effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F5-1]
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
A production button that can be operated by the player,
It is a game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first display is a meter image display.
One of the plurality of displays is a second display.
The second display is a button image display.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect.
In the first effect, the button image is displayed during the display of the meter image, the meter value of the meter image is increased in connection with the operation of the effect button by the player, and the degree of increase of the meter value is increased. Suggests jackpot expectations by
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect F5-2]
In the first effect, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from the periphery of the button image in connection with the operation of the effect button by the player, and the meter value of the meter image is the moving display object. Ascends as it reaches the display area of the meter image,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1.
[Aspect F5-3]
The moving display object is generated every time the player operates the effect button.
The gaming machine according to the aspect F5-2.
[Aspect F5-4]
When the meter value of the previous meter image is full, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-3.
[Aspect F5-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect.
In the second effect, a battle effect is performed in which a player's ally character and an enemy character play against each other while the meter image is displayed, and when the ally character wins, the button image is displayed. It suggests that the jackpot is confirmed by filling up the meter value of the previous meter image.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F5-1 to F5-4.
[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a sparrow ball game machine instead of the pachinko game machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 64. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-mentioned display effect may be executed on the sub-display device.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect can be modified or improved without departing from its purpose and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 18 ... 3rd movable accessory 20 ... 1st starting port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd entry port)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect that performs the first zone effect.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and the first zone effect and the second zone effect end at the same timing.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images